Home

User Manual(130321)

1. Parameter description MAC Table Columns Switch stack only The stack unit where the entry is learned e Type Indicates whether the entry is a static or a dynamic entry eo VLAN The VLAN ID of the entry MAC address The MAC address of the entry Port Members The ports that are members of the entry e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh Clear lt lt gt gt You can click them for refresh the MAC address entries by manual or press clear to clean up the MAC table Others press lt lt or gt gt to upper or down page of the table 140 3 10 VLAN To assign a specific VLAN for management purpose The management VLAN is used to establish an IP connection to the switch from a workstation connected to a port in the VLAN This connection supports a VSM SNMP and Telnet session By default the active management VLAN is VLAN 1 but you can designate any VLAN as the management VLAN using the Management VLAN window Only one management VLAN can be active at a time When you specify a new management VLAN your HTTP connection to the old management VLAN is lost For this reason you should have a connection between your management station and a port in the new management VLAN or connect to the new management VLAN through a multi VLAN route 3 10 1 VLAN Membership The VLAN memb
2. User QCE Frame Type Port Class Action DSCP Conflict No entries Parameter description eo User Indicates the QCL user e QCE Indicates the index of QCE eo Frame Type Indicates the type of frame to look for incomming frames Possible frame types are Any The QCE will match all frame type Ethernet Only Ethernet frames with Ether Type 0x600 OxFFFF are allowed LLC Only LLC frames are allowed LLC Only SNAP frames are allowed IPv4 The QCE will match only IPV4 frames IPv6 The QCE will match only IPV6 frames Port Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE eo Action Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters configured are matched with the frame s content There are three action fields Class DPL and DSCP Class Classified QoS Class if a frame matches the QCE it will be put in the queue DPL Drop Precedence Level if a frame matches the QCE then DP level will set to value 193 displayed under DPL column DSCP If a frame matches the QCE then DSCP will be classified with the value displayed under DSCP column Conflict Displays QCE status It may happen that resources required to add a QCE may not available in that case it shows conflict status as Yes otherwise it is always No Please note that conflict can be resolved by releasing the resource required by the QCE and pressing Refresh button Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon
3. cccssssssssssssccssssccccssscccesssccccsssccccsscescessaccscssnsecssssscceses 3 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION weccsccssccsssstssbeasecvesesecevssedesvssea sosscvsessavesnsssavenvedevessssesecoesess 4 2 1 SYSTEM INFORMATION lt i nr eare evs ced cues sccecdesbesedesetdacct sab cadsectseesul cubes cts candeced evi seleaca vaca iaa 4 Z Ted Uf OVMALON a dd aa stenoses 4 22 TED CONPLQUP ALON lt td dt ltd dali 7 SEO II AAA O AN 8 222 TIME S eh cds aces caveieed cvs E E ev A ev ele ds 9 VAPA IMAN dd idad 9 AAN AA AN Il 2 3 ACCOUNT vei sad cvs ca desctvsicnd eves E a a ed 12 PES E OA A ee eR oP PE 12 273 2 Privilege Level Titi ays 14 O OE OR Pe aOR 16 PAZ GLH CAE AA re Ee 16 DEA DT PVG A a a EEE E ee oe O ty aS EE ee oe oe DN tee ae E i oA Se E E 18 ZO SO A A A A A AE A E Antes 19 ZA Configuration is iO A A da Nestea eee SA 19 LID LOA AA A A A A A aa 20 ZII DEA led Lo ii AI A AA A Tes 21 DOS MP a A A a ee dati 22 BOL INSI iii A E AEREO IA EA Aida ais 22 2 6 2 CON QUT ALION ii A AA A ies 24 UE SS US AA A estes nee R ok thes oe ied ise ed a hes wed sev GER oh Ea EEA 25 BOAT SA a ed recia Beal eta dd esco al ed e al coat hae al 26 BODTOUPS A A AA A eds 28 DOES A A a edo 29 AS 1 CESS RPE RE OREN SE RE PP Te ee ee 31 DOLO AUD ENE EEE O EEN E O E OEE bed 33 CONFIGURATION niren era ai eeii rire E EA EEA E aaea E ES EENET EEEE ETETE 35 FA PORT as 35 ILLA CONTBUTA ON A A ici 35 D212 POr DES CPU id ta lia aE E ESATEN 38 Ded Fe TV OPI OVER iddad
4. All 8 octets in the attribute s value must be identical and consist of ASCII characters in the range 0 3 which translates into the desired QoS Class in the range 0 3 RADI US Assigned VLAN Enabled 259 When RADIUS Assigned VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled checked for a given port the switch reacts to VLAN ID information carried in the RADIUS Access Accept packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated If present and valid the port s Port VLAN ID will be changed to this VLAN ID the port will be set to be a member of that VLAN ID and the port will be forced into VLAN unaware mode Once assigned all traffic arriving on the port will be classified and switched on the RADIUS assigned VLAN ID If re authentication fails or the RADIUS Access Accept packet no longer carries a VLAN ID or it s invalid or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the port the port s VLAN ID is immediately reverted to the original VLAN ID which may be changed by the administrator in the meanwhile without affecting the RADIUS assigned This option is only available for single client modes i e e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X For trouble shooting VLAN assignments use the Monitor gt VLANs gt VLAN Membership and VLAN Port pages These pages show which modules have temporarily overridden the current Port VLAN configuration RADIUS attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID RFC
5. Click the Apply to save the setting If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 7 1 The MVR Configuration MVR Configuration MVR Made Disie VLANID 100 Port Configuration Immediate Leave Disabled al Disabled v Receiver Y Disabled Disabled v Receiver Y Disabled Disabled di Disabled Y Receiver Disabled Disabled Y Receiver v Disabled Disabled Receiver Y Disabled 1 2 3 4 5 Disabled Y Receiver Y 6 e 8 9 Disabled Y Receiver Y Disabled 10 Disabled v Receiver Y Disabled 11 Disabled v Receiver Y Disabled 12 Disabled v Receiver Y Disabled 13 Disabled v Receiver Y Disabled y 14 Disabled Y Receiver Y Disabled al 15 Disabled v Receiver Y Disabled 16 Disabled v Receiver Y Disabled Y 17 Disabled Y Receiver Y Disabled 18 Disabled v Receiver Y Disabled lt lt SSNS SSH SHS SH SH SHS SH SS Se lt lt 19 Disabled v Receiver Y Disabled AA Diana aa i Danie t Mianta lal 115 E 9 Parameter description e MVR Mode Enable Disable the
6. Indicates the MAC address e VLANID Indicates the VLAN ID e Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each MAC based VLAN entry To include a port in a MAC based VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the MAC based VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked e Adding a New MAC based VLAN Click to add a new MAC based VLAN entry An empty row is added to the table and the MAC based VLAN entry can be configured as needed Any unicast MAC address can be configured for the MAC based VLAN entry No broadcast or multicast MAC addresses are allowed Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The MAC based VLAN entry is enabled on the selected stack switch unit when you click on Save A MAC based VLAN without any port members on any stack unit will be deleted when you click Save The button can be used to undo the addition of new MAC based VLANs 0 Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 152 3 10 6 2 Status This section shows MAC based VLAN entries configured by various MAC based VLAN users Currently we support following VLAN User types NAS NAS provides port based authentication which involves communications between a Supplicant Authenticator and an Authentication Server Web Interface To Display MAC based VLAN configured in the web i
7. POP3 is designed to delete mail on the server as soon as the user has downloaded it However some implementations allow users or an administrator to specify that mail be saved for some period of time POP can be thought of as a store and forward service An alternative protocol is Internet Message Access Protocol IMAP IMAP provides the user with more capabilities for retaining e mail on the server and for organizing it in folders on the server IMAP can be thought of as a remote file server POP and IMAP deal with the receiving of e mail and are not to be confused with the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP You send e mail with SMTP and a mail handler receives it on your recipient s behalf Then the mail is read using POP or IMAP IMAP4 and POP3 are the two most prevalent Internet standard protocols for e mail retrieval Virtually all modern e mail clients and servers support both 310 Private VLAN In a private VLAN communication between ports in that private VLAN is not permitted A VLAN can be configured as a private VLAN PTP PTP is an acronym for Precision Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems 311 QCE QCE is an acronym for QoS Control Entry It describes QoS class associated with a particular QCE ID There are six QCE frame types Ethernet Type VLAN UDP TCP Port DSCP TOS and Tag Priority Frames can be classified by one of 4 different QoS classes Low Normal
8. The total number of entries is 5 for the given level Start from ID 1 with 20 entries per page ID Level Time Message 1 Warning 2011 01 01 00 00 08 Switch just made a warm boot 2 Warning 2011 01 01 00 00 10 Link up on port 21 a 2011 01 01 00 00 25 Login passed for user admin 4 2011 01 01 00 00 55 User admin saved running config a g 2011 01 01 00 00 57 User admin saved running config a Parameter description e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the log automatically e Level level of the system log entry The following level types are supported Information level of the system log Warning Warning level of the system log Error Error level of the system log All All levels o ID ID gt 1 of the system log entry e Time It will display the log record by device time The time of the system log entry Message It will display the log detail message The message of the system log entry e Upper right icon Refresh clear You can click them for refresh the system log or clear them by manual others for next up page or entry 20 2 5 3 Detailed Log This section describes that display the detailed log information of the switch Web Interface To display the detailed log configuration in the web interface 1 Click Syslog Detailed Log 2 Display the log information Figure2 5
9. Clear Clears the counters for selected ports Clear all Clears the counters for all ports 203 3 16 Loop Protection The loop detection is used to detect the presence of traffic When switch receives packet s looping detection frame MAC address the same as oneself from port show Loop Protection happens The port will be locked when it received the looping detection frames If you want to resume the locked port please find out the looping path and take off the looping path then select the resume the locked port and click on Resume to turn on the locked ports 3 16 1 Configuration The section describes how to set Loop Protection Web Interface To configure the Loop Protection parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Loop Protection Configuration 2 Evoke to select enable or disable the port loop Protection 3 Click the save to save the setting 4 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button 5 It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 16 1 The Loop Detection Configuration General Settings Global Configuration Enable Loop Protection Disable Y Transmission Time 5 seconds Shutdown Time 10 secands Port Configuration Port Enable Action Tx Mode A gt iL ETA Shutdown Port nL e Pe Serato O 5 PY __ Shutdown Port E E Shutdown Port soma Shutdown Port Shutdown Port n PY Show Port 3 E Shutdown Port e nm m
10. MAC Table Learning Port Members f2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Auto sli Bit ai l 51sB1 SIS Ia Sil GIGI GIGI ails SII lal S Disable OI O OLOLOLOLO OLOLOLOLOLOLOLOLOLOLOLOLOLOLOLOLOLOLOLOLO secure OL OLO OlOlOloloOlolololololololololololololololololololo Static MAC Table Configuration Port Members Delete VLAN ID MAC Address ion nao Static MAC Table Configuration Port Members Delete VLANID MAC Address 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Dae J 1 1 00 00 00 00 00 00 ODIO ODIO IDO IO IDO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 IDIDIOIO Parameter description e Aging Configuration By default dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table after 300 seconds This removal is also called aging Configure aging time by entering a value here in seconds for example Age time seconds The allowed range is 10 to 1000000 seconds Disable the automatic aging of dynamic entries by checking M Disable automatic aging MAC Table Learning If the learning mode for a given port is greyed out another module is in control of the mode so that it cannot be changed by the user An example of such a module is the MAC Based Authentication under 802 1X Each port can do learning based upon the following settings e Auto Learning
11. Port Error Recovery Timeout Apply Parameter description Basic Settings e Protocol Version The STP protocol version setting Valid values are STP RSTP and MSTP e Bridge Priority Controls the bridge priority Lower numeric values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier For MSTP operation this is the priority of the CIST Otherwise this is the priority of the STP RSTP bridge e Forward Delay The delay used by STP Bridges to transit Root and Designated Ports to Forwarding used in STP compatible mode Valid values are in the range 4 to 30 seconds Max Age The maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the Root Bridge Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 seconds and MaxAge must be lt FwdDelay 1 2 e Maximum Hop Count This defines the initial value of remaining Hops for MSTI information generated at the boundary of an MSTI region It defines how many bridges a root bridge can distribute its BPDU information to Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 hops e Transmit Hold Count The number of BPDU s a bridge port can send per second When exceeded transmission of the next BPDU will be delayed Valid values are in the range 1 to 10 BPDU s per second 76 Advanced Settings Edge Port BPDU Filtering Control whether a port explicitly configu
12. lt lt lt Eeeeh CHC SHH S SS S S S lt lt lt lt lt i lt lt lt lt lt 204 Parameter description Enable Loop Protection Controls whether loop protections is enabled as a whole e Transmission Time The interval between each loop protection PDU sent on each port valid values are 1 to 10 seconds e Shutdown Time The period in seconds for which a port will be kept disabled in the event of a loop is detected and the port action shuts down the port Valid values are 0 to 604800 seconds 7 days A value of zero will keep a port disabled until next device restart e Port No The switch port number of the port e Enable Controls whether loop protection is enabled on this switch port e Action Configures the action performed when a loop is detected on a port Valid values are Shutdown Port Shutdown Port and Log or Log Only e Tx Mode Controls whether the port is actively generating loop protection PDU s or whether it is just passively looking for looped PDU s e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 205 3 16 2 Status The section describes how to display the Loop Protection status what you set on the switch and the Loop protection status Web Interface To display the Loop protection parameters in the web inter
13. Click Configuration SMTP Configuration Scroll to select the Severity Level Specify the parameters in each blank field Click the Apply to save the setting If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 19 The SMTP Configuration SMTP Configuration Severity Level Sender Os SSC CSSC S Rear Path Email En Address 1 Address2 7 Address 2 Maresa 7 Address 3 Address 4 isiress Address 5 marese 7 Address 6 Parameter description These parameters are displayed on the SMTP Configuration page o Mail Server Specify the IP Address of the server transferring your email o Username Specify the username on the mail server o Password 212 Specify the password on the mail server Sender To set the mail sender name Return Path To set the mail return path as sender mail address Email Address 1 6 Email address that would like to receive the alarm message Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 213 3 20 802 3ah OAM For Ethernet application that customer need to reduce operating cost and increase the remote maintain availability The advent of Ethernet as a metropolitan and wide area networking technology has accelerated the need for a new set of OAM protocols Service provider networks are
14. Controls the bridge priority Lower numeric values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier Oo Buttons 80 Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 81 3 4 4 CIST Ports When you implement an Spanning Tree protocol on the switch that the bridge instance You need to configure the CIST Ports The section describes it allows the user to inspect the to inspect the current STP CIST port configurations and possibly change them as well Web Interface To configure the Spanning Tree CIST Ports parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Spanning Tree CIST Ports 2 Scroll and evoke to set all parameters of CIST Aggregated Port Configuration 3 Evoke to enable or disable the STP then scoll and evoke to set all parameters of the CIST normal Port configuration Click the save to save the setting If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 4 4 The STP CI ST Port Configuration STP CIST Port Configuration CIST Aggregated Port C CIST Normal Port Configuration ic vl osc vier a a Te y a aad Non Edge Y Y a C C Anto a a ojo O a Auto vi 128 Non Edge v Y O O O Anto a RULE a o o O a A a ojc a y OJO O a a ojo O a Aut
15. Medium and High for individual application QCL QCL is an acronym for QoS Control List It is the list table of QCEs containing QoS control entries that classify to a specific QoS class on specific traffic objects Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its QCL The privileges determine specific traffic object to specific QoS class QL QL In SyncE this is the Quality Level of a given clock source This is received on a port in a SSM indicating the quality of the clock received in the port QoS QoS is an acronym for Quality of Service It is a method to guarantee a bandwidth relationship between individual applications or protocols A communications network transports a multitude of applications and data including high quality video and delay sensitive data such as real time voice Networks must provide secure predictable measurable and sometimes guaranteed services Achieving the required QoS becomes the secret to a successful end to end business solution Therefore QoS is the set of techniques to manage network resources R RARP RARP is an acronym for Reverse Address Resolution Protocol It is a protocol that is used to obtain an IP address for a given hardware address such as an Ethernet address RARP is the complement of ARP RADIUS RADIUS is an acronym for Remote Authentication Dial In User Service It is a networking protocol that provides centralized access authorization and accounting management
16. NFS is an acronym for Network File System It allows hosts to mount partitions on a remote system and use them as though they are local file systems NFS allows the system administrator to store resources in a central location on the network providing authorized users continuous access to them which means NFS supports sharing of files printers and other resources as persistent storage over a computer network NTP is an acronym for Network Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems NTP uses UDP datagrams as transport layer OAM is an acronym for Operation Administration and Maintenance It is a protocol described in ITU T Y 1731 used to implement ethernet functionality MEP functionality like CC and RDI is based on this Optional TLVs OUI ALLDP frame contains multiple TLVs For some TLVs it is configurable if the switch shall include the TLV in the LLDP frame These TLVs are known as optional TLVs If an optional TLVs is disabled the corresponding information is not included in the LLDP frame OUI is the organizationally unique identifier An OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by IEEE You can determine which vendor a device belongs to 309 PCP PD PHY PING PoE according to the OUI address which forms the first 24 bits of a MAC address PCP is an acronym for Priority Code Point It is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 1Q fr
17. Number of received packets from the interface when access management mode is enabled e Allowed Packets Number of allowed packets from the interface when access management mode is enabled Discarded Packets Number of discarded packets from the interface when access management mode is enabled e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh Clear You can click them for refresh the Access Management Statistics information by manual Others you can click the clear button to clean up all entries 283 4 9 SSH This section shows you to use SSH Secure Shell to securely access the Switch SSH is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted communication Web Interface To configure a SSH Configuration in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Mode of SSH Configuration 2 Click Apply Figure 4 9 1 The SSH Configuration SSH Configuration Mode Apply Parameter description e Mode Indicates the SSH mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable SSH mode operation Disabled Disable SSH mode operation e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 284 4 10 HTTPs This section shows you how to use HTTPS to securely access the Switch HTTPS is a secure communicat
18. Security Model Security Level Read View Name Write View Name SNMPGrowpl v any NoAuth NoPriv v None None v Apply Parameter description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Group Name A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Security Model Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are any Any security model accepted v1 v2c usm v1 Reserved for SNMPv1 v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c usm User based Security Model USM e Security Level 31 Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are NoAuth NoPriv No authentication and no privacy Auth NoPriv Authentication and no privacy Auth Priv Authentication and privacy e Read View Name The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may request the current values The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Write View Name The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may potentially set new values The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 32 2 6 8 Tarp The function is used to conf
19. gt gt You can click them for refresh the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table by manual others for next up page or entry 245 4 3 DHCP Snooping The section describes to configure the DHCP Snooping parameters of the switch The DHCP Snooping can prevent attackers from adding their own DHCP servers to the network 4 3 1 Configuration This section describes how to configure DHCP Snooping setting including Snooping Mode Enabled and Disabled Port Mode Configuration Trusted Untrusted Web Interface To configure a DHCP Snooping in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Mode of DHCP Snooping Configuration 2 Select Trusted of the specific port in the Mode of Port Mode Configuration 3 Click Apply Figure 4 3 1 The DHCP Snooping Configuration DHCP Snooping Configuration Snooping Mode Port Mode Configuration 14 1 Untmsted Y 246 Parameter description e Snooping Mode Indicates the DHCP snooping mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable DHCP snooping mode operation When DHCP snooping mode operation is enabled the DHCP request messages will be forwarded to trusted ports and only allow reply packets from trusted ports Disabled Disable DHCP snooping mode operation e Port Mode Indicates the DHCP snooping port mode Possible port modes are Trusted Configures the port as trusted source of the DHCP messages Untrusted Configures the port as untrusted source of the
20. 03 21 2013 A3 Vili INTRODUCTION Overview In this user s manual it will not only tell you how to install and connect your network system but configure and monitor the SW24GF4TG through the built in CLI and web by RS 232 serial interface and Ethernet ports step by step Many explanations in detail of hardware and software functions are shown as well as the examples of the operation for web based interface and command line interface CLI The SW24GF4TG the next generation L2 Ethernet Access Fiber switches from Manufacture is a 20 port GbE SFP 4 port Combo GbE RJ 45 SFP and 4 port LOGbE SFP Ethernet L2 Ethernet Switch portfolio of affordable switches that provides a reliable infrastructure for your business network These switches deliver more intelligent features you need to improve the availability of your critical business applications protect your sensitive information and optimize your network bandwidth to deliver information and applications more effectively It provides the ideal combination of affordability and capabilities for entry level networking includes small business or enterprise application and helps you create a more efficient better connected workforce SW24GF4TG L2 Ethernet Access Switch provide 20 ports 100 1G SFP 4 P Combo Gigabit TP 100 1G SFP and 4 P 1G 10G SFP in a single device the specification is highlighted as follows e L2 features provide better manageability security
21. 1310nm 1550nm and so on e Baud Rate Display the maximum baud rate of the fiber module supported for instance 10M 100M 1G and so on e Vendor OUI Display the Manufacturer s OUI code which is assigned by I EEE Vendor Name 47 Display the company name of the module manufacturer Vendor P N Display the product name of the naming by module manufacturer Vendor Rev Revision Display the module revision Vendor SN Serial Number Show the serial number assigned by the manufacturer Date Code Show the date this SFP module was made Temperature Show the current temperature of SFP module Vcc Show the working DC voltage of SFP module Mon1 Bias mA Show the Bias current of SFP module Mon2 TX PWR Show the transmit power of SFP module Mon3 RX PWR Show the receiver power of SFP module 48 3 2 ACL The SW24GF4TG switch access control list ACL is probably the most commonly used object in the IOS It is used for packet filtering but also for selecting types of traffic to be analyzed forwarded or influenced in some way The ACLs are divided into EtherTypes IPv4 ARP protocol MAC and VLAN parameters etc Here we will just go over the standard and extended access lists for TCP IP As you create ACEs for ingress classification you can assign a policy for each port the policy number is 1 8 however each policy can be applied to any port This makes it very easy to determine what type of ACL policy you will
22. Click Yes Figure 5 1 1 The Restart Device Restart Device Are you sure you want to perform a Restart Parameter description e Restart Device You can restart the stack switch on this page After restart the stack switch will boot normally O Buttons Yes Click to Yes then the device will restart No Click to undo any restart action 287 5 2 Firmware This section describes how to upgrade Firmware The Switch can be enhanced with more value added functions by installing firmware upgrades 5 2 1 Firmware Upgrade This page facilitates an update of the firmware controlling the Switch Web Interface To configure a Firmware Upgrade Configuration in the web interface 1 Chick Browser to select firmware in you device 2 Click Upload Figure 5 2 1 The Firmware update Firmware Update Ci Parameter description e Browse Click the Browse button to search the Firmware URL and filename e Upload Click the Upload button then the switch will start to upload the firmware from firmware stored location PC or Server Gi Note This page facilitates an update of the firmware controlling the stack switch Uploading software will update all managed switches in the stack to the location of a software image and click After the software image is uploaded a page announces that the firmware update is initiated After about a minute the firmware is updated and all managed switches
23. DSCP Based oy Vl ENEE O 1 0 Ov Ovo Disabled O a 0 ov Ov 0 Disabled O 3 0 Ov Ov 1 0 Disabled O 4 0 0 Ov 0 Disabled O 5 10 ov 0 w 10 Disabled O 6 0 ov owi owl Disabled O 7 10m Ov Ov 10 Disabled O 8 0 Ov 0 w 10 Disabled O g 0 ov 0 0 w Disabled O 10 0 low Moslo Disabled O 11 Ov low o vio wll Disabled Fl 169 Parameter description Port The port number for which the configuration below applies QoS class Controls the default QoS class i e the QoS class for frames not classified in any other way There is a one to one mapping between QoS class queue and priority A QoS class of 0 zero has the lowest priority DP level Controls the default DP level e the DP level for frames not classified in any other way PCP Controls the default PCP for untagged frames DEI Controls the default DEI for untagged frames Tag Class Shows the classification mode for tagged frames on this port Disabled Use default QoS class and DP level for tagged frames Enabled Use mapped versions of PCP and DEI for tagged frames Click on the mode in order to configure the mode and or mapping DSCP Based Click to Enable DSCP Based QoS Ingress Port Classification Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 170 3 14 2 Port Policing This section provides a
24. Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped e Rate Limiter Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE The allowed range is 1 to 16 When Disabled is displayed the rate limiter operation is disabled o Port Redirect Frames that hit the ACE are redirected to the port number specified here The allowed range is the same as the switch port number range Disabled indicates that the port redirect operation is disabled e Counter The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame e Modification Buttons e can modify each ACE Access Control Entry in the table using the following uttons O Inserts a new ACE before the current row Edits the ACE row O Moves the ACE up the list X Moves the ACE down the list O Deletes the ACE O The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the ACE listings MAC Parameters o SMAC Filter Only displayed when the frame type is Ethernet Type or ARP Specify the source MAC filter for this ACE Any No SMAC filter is specified SMAC filter status is don t care Specific f you want to filter a specific source MAC address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering an SMAC value appears eo SMAC Value When Specific is selected for the SMAC filter you can enter a specific source MAC address The legal format is XX XX XX XX XX XX Or XX XX XX XX XX XX OF XXXXXXXXXXXX X is a hex
25. To configure a Static IP Source Guard Table Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Add new entry 2 Specify the Port VLAN ID IP Address and MAC address in the entry 3 Click Apply Figure 4 1 2 The Static I P Source Guard Table Static IP Source Guard Table Delete Port VLANID IP Address IP Mask Static IP Source Guard Table Delete Port VLANID IP Address IP Mask Parameter description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save eo Port The logical port for the settings e VLANID The vlan id for the settings e IP Address Allowed Source IP address IP Mask It can be used for calculating the allowed network with IP address e MAC address Allowed Source MAC address e Adding new entry Click to add a new entry to the Static IP Source Guard table Specify the Port VLAN ID IP 239 address and IP Mask for the new entry Click Save e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 240 4 1 3 Dynamic Table The section describes to configure the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table parameters of the switch You could use the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table configure to manage the entries Web Interface To configure a Dynamic IP Source Guard Table Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify the Start from port VLAN ID IP Addres
26. are allowed LLC Only LLC frames are allowed SNAP Only SNAP frames are allowed IPv4 The QCE will match only IPV4 frames IPv6 The QCE will match only IPV6 frames eo SMAC Displays the OUI field of Source MAC address i e first three octet byte of MAC address eo DMAC Specify the type of Destination MAC addresses for incoming frame Possible values are Any All types of Destination MAC addresses are allowed Unicast Only Unicast MAC addresses are allowed Multicast Only Multicast MAC addresses are allowed Broadcast Only Broadcast MAC addresses are allowed The default value is Any e VID Indicates VLAN ID either a specific VID or range of VIDs VID can be in the range 1 4095 or Any e Conflict Displays QCE status It may happen that resources required to add a QCE may not available in that case it shows conflict status as Yes otherwise it is always No Please note that conflict can be resolved by releasing the resource required by the QCE and pressing Refresh button e Action Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters configured are matched with the frame s content There are three action fields Class DPL and DSCP Class Classified QoS Class if a frame matches the QCE it will be put in the queue DPL Drop Precedence Level if a frame matches the QCE then DP level will set to value displayed under DPL column DSCP If a frame matches the QCE then DSCP will be
27. e System Contact The textual identification of the contact person for this managed node together with information on how to contact this person The allowed string length is O to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126 eo System Name An administratively assigned name for this managed node By convention this is the node s fully qualified domain name A domain name is a text string drawn from the alphabet A Za z digits 0 9 minus sign No space characters are permitted as part of a name The first character must be an alpha character And the first or last character must not be a minus sign The allowed string length is O to 255 e System Location The physical location of this node e g telephone closet 3rd floor The allowed string length is O to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126 2 1 3 CPU Load This page displays the CPU load using an SVG graph The load is measured as averaged over the last 100ms lsec and 10 seconds intervals The last 120 samples are graphed and the last numbers are displayed as text as well In order to display the SVG graph your browser must support the SVG format Consult the SVG Wiki for more information on browser support Specifically at the time of writing Microsoft Internet Explorer will need to have a plugin installed to support SVG Web interface To configure System Information in the web interface 1 Click System
28. is a Port Esp Future use needs to upgrade FW then will support it Evc This will create an EPS in the EVC Domain W P Flow is an EVC Mpls Future use needs to upgrade FW then will support it e Architecture The field you can scroll to select architecture of EPS as 1 1 or 1 1 1 1 This will create a 1 1 EPS 228 1 1 This will create a 1 1 EPS W flow The field you need to assign the working flow for the EPS See Domain P flow The field you need to assign the Protecting flow for the EPS See Domain W SF MEP The field you need to assign the working Signal Fail reporting MEP P SF MEP The field you need to assign the protecting Signal Fail reporting MEP APS MEP The field you need to assign the APS PDU handling MEP Alarm There is an active alarm on the EPS When you complete the setting then switch will show the alarm status Buttons Add new EPS Click to add a new EPS entry Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the refresh information by manual 229 3 23 ERPS The chapter describes the Ethernet Ring Protection Switching ERPS It is an effort at ITU T under G 8032 Recommendation to provide sub 50ms protection and recovery switching for Ethernet traffic in a ring topology and at the same time ensuring that there are no loops formed at the
29. nioran eerie e E E RE E A AT E A O T ATE E N Ia 204 3 16 1 Configura onah imaa r a e EE E E E E N E EEE Va 204 BEE LOAD OAC 1 ES e A NE A A AN 206 IAMT MIRRORIN Gia 208 3 18 TRAP EVENT SEVERA iban 210 3 19SMTP CONFIGURATION tii Soc ches e Laa doce tad Lt eee Eat A A calida 212 3 20 80223 AH OA Mes viii amp A amp echoes AA A AN II E fs E eee Bias eats Es 214 S220 1 Poft CONftS Li A east a Gist peter A een Wee ieee As 214 320 2 EVENT CONDE adds 217 3220 3 ASA A O NN 219 3220 4 Dink E ed a sad oy 221 SEA NA RE RN 224 ILMETHERNE TO AM e a lr ad e a a 226 322 BPS ais NR RN 228 I2 ERPS a aaa A E a Bees a a a EAS ei ERE 230 32A PTP e e aa ecu aa a a a Beds A A a Besides havea Ate a eds Res 232 3 24 1 Confie r tl on sreo a cs Ad dida it awed 232 EIA ARA A E a IIA 235 JNE RT 237 4 1 TP SOURCEGUARD coo 237 AALASCON IZUT OO A A cda 237 ALZAS ARE TAC a a da 239 4 1 3 Dynamic Table id A aS ee iA Bia IA ately 241 4 2 ARP INSPECTION cocoa ia 242 ALA CONPLQUTATION a a it dr 242 EA SUAIG TAU AREA E RO 244 4 23 Dynamic Table id iii aia s 245 423 DHCP SNOOPING henne air E A E A A A A A 246 AJA Configuration ii a a lili 246 BaSED SUGLISTIC S25 cies esas az a a a a a a icv oe Pate Bac ae a aas aaua a Be ie hab tas a enaa 248 AMATI CR RELAY ale de 250 Bed DCONNIBUTA O iii da A E ds seb seeds estes Wap bvne deen sleet lidad 250 Beh D2 SUGLISTICS 2 ok coe Seat ele es ecu Wve vies A add 252 NINAS Gece Beas AEE e es 254 4 3 1 Configuration e cd
30. 40 Sa Le DCL Aled SIGHS CS calcite a A E ET 42 DDD Qos SUALISTLCS E RN 45 3 1 6 SEP Informat r siioni pieniniai iaae ide adidas 47 BED A E EE EEE A A A E EEE A E EE A EEE AEE EATE ibis Sina esi iis 49 LAO cesses th anh ea OEO E EAO EOE OE EEEE EA 49 EPAIA A ET IIA ER AAN 52 I2 I ACCESS Control SN O RENO 54 ISLA EAN NIEA ESITE IE OE EAEE EROE OEA AE E EEEE EEOAE 63 3I AGGREGATION 2 A ei Ae A ea Ane 65 ES NA E LEETE ent eh AAN 65 AS ON 65 ESA E E ES E EASE EAEE AE O AEA seats oucsveedend toubsounoeeebee cts 68 332 L Contig uration se n aea a R E RARI T E AN E AN a 68 AA A KSI T N KAE AEE E E E E T 70 3 3 2 3 Port Stats ica a n ani 3 3 2 4 Port Statistics 3 4 SPANNING E i A SE iia TAL BEAR SERES ii A oie E E E A E N A aE lia 22452 MSIL MGP pine A ae E EE EL E E E E EL a 343 MSTIPRON ES rea os ce E ats e EA A E RAEN gs IALA CISL POPES aeaee a a e Sh cea bees e a e a bed au e e a a a a cee eve e a a aT 82 S45 MST A tie 85 JA 6 Bridge Status ie iets coach cg e as 88 SAT POLE MAUS A a E a 89 324 8 POLE RT TA 9 iv 3 5 IGMP SNOOPING it ad ge 91 3 9 BASIC CONPIQUIATION ci ii di leeis 92 3 9 2 VLAN CONfIgUT OO iii id eiii deis 95 3 3 3 POr Group Filtering titi eat iria teta ers idas 97 TOA Ai essed eeviedcuseds E evict datdecoluasauseddancuestesumiasedeseuvesectaelese 99 SDD GTOUDANJOTMAON vss ii ii iii Decide 101 3 5 6 IPV4 SSM Informal ON ssescssvcscsegsusesesieejenstesteiesolousesstescubvesduninustyorsiostiebseserseoueea
31. 802 2 LLC more protocols than can be distinguished by the 8 bit 802 2 Service Access Point SAP fields SNAP supports identifying protocols by Ethernet type field values it also supports vendor private protocol identifier spaces It is used with IEEE 802 3 IEEE 802 4 IEEE 802 5 IEEE 802 11 and other IEEE 802 physical network layers as well as with non IEEE 802 physical network layers such as FDDI that use 802 2 LLC 3 10 7 1 Protocol to Group This page allows you to add new protocols to Group Name unique for each Group mapping entries as well as allow you to see and delete already mapped entries for the selected stack switch unit switch Web Interface To configure Protocol based VLAN configuration in the web interface 1 Click Protocol based VLAN configuration and add new entry 2 Specify the Ethernet LLC SNAP Protocol and Group Name 3 Click Apply Figure 3 10 7 1 The Protocol to Group Mapping Table Protocol to Group Mapping Table Delete Frame Type Value Group Name No Group entry found Protocol to Group Mapping Table Delete Frame Type Value Group Name Pe J Ehemet v Etype Ox 0800 154 Parameter description e Delete To delete a Protocol to Group Name map entry check this box The entry will be deleted on the switch during the next Save eo Frame Type Frame Type can have one of the following values 1 Ethernet 2 LLC 3 SNAP
32. ACE s or ingress port s AES is an acronym for Advanced Encryption Standard The encryption key protocol is applied in 802 1i standard to improve WLAN security It is an encryption standard by the U S government which will replace DES and 3DES AES has a fixed block size of 128 bits and a key size of 128 192 or 256 bits APS is an acronym for Automatic Protection Switching This protocol is used to secure that switching is done bidirectional in the two ends of a protection group as defined in G 8031 Aggregation Using multiple ports in parallel to increase the link speed beyond the limits of a port and to increase the redundancy for higher availability Also Port Aggregation Link Aggregation ARP ARP is an acronym for Address Resolution Protocol It is a protocol that used to convert an IP address into a physical address such as an Ethernet address ARP allows a host to communicate with other hosts when only the Internet address of its neighbors is known Before using IP the host sends a broadcast ARP request containing the Internet address of the desired destination system ARP Inspection ARP Inspection is a secure feature Several types of attacks can be launched against a host or devices connected to Layer 2 networks by poisoning the ARP caches This feature is used to block such attacks Only valid ARP requests and responses can go through the switch device Auto Negotiation Auto negotiation is the process where
33. DHCP messages e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 247 4 3 2 Statistics The section describes to show the DHCP Snooping Statistics information of the switch The statistics show only packet counters when DHCP snooping mode is enabled and relay mode is disabled And it doesn t count the DHCP packets for DHCP client Web Interface To configure a DHCP Snooping Statistics Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify the Port which you want to monitor 2 Checked Auto refresh Figure 4 3 2 The DHCP Snooping Port Statistics DHCP Snooping Port Statistics Port 1 Receive Packets Transmit Packets Rx Discover 0 Tx Discover 0 Rx Offer O Tx Offer 0 Rx Request O Tx Request 0 Rx Decline 0 Tx Decline D Rx ACK O Tx ACK 0 Rx NAK O Tx NAK 0 Rx Release O Tx Release 0 Rx Inform 0 Tx Inform 0 Rx Lease Query 0 Tx Lease Query 0 Rx Lease Unassigned 0 Tx Lease Unassigned 0 Rx Lease Unknown O Tx Lease Unknown D Rx Lease Active 0 Tx Lease Active D Parameter description Rx and Tx Discover The number of discover option 53 with value 1 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Offer The number of offer option 53 with value 2 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Request The number of request option 53 with value 3 packets received and tran
34. Ethernet layer The switch supports the Ethernet Ring Protection Switch instances are configured here Web Interface To configure the ERPS in the web interface 1 Click Configuration ERPS 2 Click Add new ERPS then you can create new ERPS entry on the switch 3 Assign each parameter to add new ERPS 4 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values 5 Click Refresh then switch will update the ERPS table by manually Figure 3 23 The ERPS Configuration Ethernet Ring Protection Switching Delete ERPS Port Port pi pot Port 0 Port 1 Ring Interconnected Virtual Major Dan ID 0 1 MEP MEP SF MEP SFMEP_ Type Node Channel Ring ID a 7 y L e l Ethernet Ring Protection Switching Refiesh Delete ERPS Port Port Poren ps Port 0 Port1 Ring Interconnected Virtual Major Alarm ID 0 1 MEP MEP SF MEP SF MEP Type Node Channel Ring ID mm P pers g g aes Apply Reset Parameter description Delete This box is used to mark an ERPS for deletion in next Save operation ERPS ID Protection group ID The ID of the created Protection group Click on the ID of an Protection group to enter the configuration page Port O E Port This will create an East port of the switch in the ring Port 1 W Port This will create a West port of the switch in the Ring As interconnected sub
35. Gi Note On changing the Frame type field valid value of the following text field will vary depending on the new frame type you selected e Value Valid value that can be entered in this text field depends on the option selected from the preceding Frame Type selection menu Below are the criteria for three different Frame Types 1 For Ethernet Values in the text field when Ethernet is selected as a Frame Type is called etype Valid values for etype ranges from 0x0600 Oxffff 2 For LLC Valid value in this case is comprised of two different sub values a DSAP 1 byte long string Ox00 Oxff b SSAP 1 byte long string Ox00 Oxff 3 For SNAP Valid value in this case also is comprised of two different sub values a OUI OUI Organizationally Unique Identifier is value in format of xx xx xx where each pair xx in string is a hexadecimal value ranges from 0x00 Oxff b PID If the OUI is hexadecimal 000000 the protocol ID is the Ethernet type EtherType field value for the protocol running on top of SNAP if the OUI is an OUI for a particular organization the protocol ID is a value assigned by that organization to the protocol running on top of SNAP In other words if value of OUI field is 00 00 00 then value of PID will be etype 0x0600 Oxffff and if value of OUI is other than 00 00 00 then valid value of PID will be any value from 0x0000 to Oxffff e Group Name A valid Group Name is a unique 16 character long string fo
36. Global MVR e VLANID Specify the Multicast VLAN ID e Mode Enable MVR on the port e Type Specify the MVR port type on the port e Immediate Leave Enable the fast leave on the port e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 116 3 7 2 Port Group Allow The section describes user could display the MVR Groups detail information on the switch Entries in the MVR Group Table are shown on this page The MVR Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by group Web Interface To display the MVR Groups Allow in the web interface 1 Click Configuration MVR Port Group Allow 2 Click the Add new Allow Group and specify the Start Address and End Address Click the Delete to delete an entry of the MVR Groups 4 Click Apply to save configuration Figure 3 7 2 The MVR Groups Information MVR Port Group Allow Configuration Delete Port StartAddress End Address Parameter description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next apply Port The logical port for the settings e Allow Groups The IP Multicast Group that will be allowed e Adding New Allow Group Click add new Allow Group to add a new entry to the Group Allow table Specify the Port and Allow Group of the new entry Click Apply e Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes ma
37. ID to be forwarded on the respective VLAN member ports e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the VLAN entries by manual 146 3 10 4 Port Status The function Port Status gathers the information of all VLAN status and reports it by the order of Static NAS MVRP MVP Voice VLAN MSTP GVRP Combined Web Interface To Display VLAN Port Status in the web interface 1 Click VLAN Port Status 2 Specify the Static NAS MVRP MVP Voice VLAN MSTP GVRP Combined 3 Display Port Status information Figure 3 10 4 The VLAN Port Status for Static user VLAN Port Status for Static user Parameter description eo Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row eo PVID Shows the VLAN identifier for that port The allowed values are 1 through 4095 The default value is 1 Port Type Shows the Port Type Port type can be any of Unaware C port S port Custom S port If Port Type is Unaware all frames are classified to the Port VLAN ID and tags are not 147 removed C port is Customer Port S port is Service port Custom S port is S port with Custom TPID Ingress Filtering Shows the ingress filtering on a port This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If ingress filtering is enabled and the ingress port is not a member of the classified VLAN the frame is discarded Fram
38. It can be specific value range of value or Any DSCP values are in the range 0 63 including BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 Sport Source TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP Dport Destination TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP e Action Configuration Class QoS Class class 0 7 default basic classification 191 DP Valid DP Level can be 0 3 default basic classification DSCP Valid DSCP value can be 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 192 3 14 12 QCL Status The section will let you know how to configure and shows the QCL status by different QCL users Each row describes the QCE that is defined It is a conflict if a specific QCE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations The maximum number of QCEs is 256 on each switch Web Interface To display the QoS Control List Status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS QCL Status 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh Scroll to select the combined static Voice VLAN and conflict To Click the Refresh to refresh an entry of the MVR Statistics information Figure 3 14 12 The QoS Control List Status QoS Control List Combine v Autorefresh E
39. LO LO 0 OO O lO JO OJO OOO OLOLO O O10 LO OF LO LO LO LO LO OF LO LO LO LO OF OO lO OF OF JO OF OF O1O 1 O10 0 LO OF LO LO O OJO LO LO LO LO LO OF OO lO JO O LO OOO OSO LOLOLO LO LO LO LO LO LO LO OF LO LO LO LO OF OO lO OO OF OF O10 O OJO POLO LO LO LOLOLO O LO LO LO TO TO LO LOTO LO LOTO LO LO 010 0 Add New Entry 159 Parameter description Group ID A valid Group ID is an integer value from 1 to 28 A set of VLAN Translations are mapped to a group Id This way a port is mapped to a list of VLAN Translations easily by mapping it to a group Number of groups in this switch is equal to the number of ports 28 present in this switch A port can be mapped to any of the groups Multiple ports can also be mapped to a group with same group Id Note By default each port is mapped to a group with a group Id equal to the port number For example port 1 is mapped to the group with ID 1 Port Members A row of radio buttons one radio button for each port is displayed for each Group ID To include a port in a Group click the radio button A port must belong to at least one group Adding a New Port to Group mapping entry Click Add New Entry to add a new entry in Port to Group Mapping Table An empty row is added to the table with the Group ID and array of radio buttons one radio button for each port click corresponding radio button to make port to be member of a particular Group The legal values for
40. Limit The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be secured on this port This number cannot exceed 1024 If the limit is exceeded the corresponding action is taken The stackswitch is born with a total number of MAC addresses from which all ports draw whenever a new MAC address is seen on a Port Security enabled port Since all ports draw from the same pool it may happen that a configured maximum cannot be granted if the remaining ports have already used all available MAC addresses e Action If Limit is reached the switch can take one of the following actions None Do not allow more than Limit MAC addresses on the port but take no further action Trap If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port send an SNMP trap If Aging is disabled only one SNMP trap will be sent but with Aging enabled new SNMP traps will be sent everytime the limit gets exceeded Shutdown If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port shut down the port This implies that all secured MAC addresses will be removed from the port and no new address will be learned Even if the link is physically disconnected and reconnected on the port by disconnecting the cable the port will remain shut down There are three ways to re open 276 the port 1 Boot the stack or elect a new masterthe switch 2 Disable and re enable Limit Control on the port or the stackswitch 3 Click the Reopen button Trap amp Shutdown If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on th
41. Multiple ports can also be mapped to a group with same group ld Note By default each port is mapped to a group with a group Id equal to the port number For example port 1 is mapped to the group with ID 1 e VLAN ID Indicates the ID to which Group ID will be mapped A valid VLAN ID ranges from 1 4094 e Adding a New VLAN Translation entry Click Add New Entry to add a new entry in VLAN Translation table An empty row is added to the table the Group ID VLAN ID and Translated to VID fields can be configured as needed Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4094 The Delete button can be used to undo the addition of new entry e Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 161 3 12 GARP The Generic Attribute Registration Protocol GARP provides a generic framework whereby devices in a bridged LAN e g end stations and switches can register and de register attribute values such as VLAN Identifiers with each other In doing so the attributes are propagated to devices in the bridged LAN and these devices form a j reachabilityj tree that is a subset of an active topology GARP defines the architecture rules of operation state machines and variables for the registration
42. O J unlimited Y an m m I intimin A Parameter description Snooping Enabled Enable the Global MLD Snooping Unregistered I PMCv6 Flooding enabled Enable unregistered IPMCv6 traffic flooding Please note that disabling unregistered IPMCv6 traffic flooding may lead to failure of Neighbor Discovery e MLD SSM Range SSM Source Specific Multicast Range allows the SSM aware hosts and routers run the SSM service model for the groups in the address Using IPv6 Address range e Proxy Enabled Enable MLD Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary join and leave messages to the router side eo Port The Port index what you enable or disable the MLD Snooping function eo Fast Leave To evoke to enable the fast leave on the port e Router Port Specify which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or MLD querier If an aggregation member port is selected as a router port the whole aggregation will act as a router port 105 e Throttling Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 106 3 6 2 V LAN Configuration When MLD snooping is enabled on a VLAN the switch acts to minimize unnecessary multicast traffic If the switch receives
43. Port This is the logical port number for this row e Description Description of device ports cannot include amp e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 39 3 1 3 Traffic Overview The section describes to the Port statistics information and provides overview of general traffic statistics for all switch ports The ports belong to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To Display the Port Statistics Overview in the web interface Click Configuration Port then Traffic Overview If you want to auto refresh then you need to evoke the Auto refresh Click Refresh to refresh the port statistics or clear all information when you click Clear Figure 3 1 3 The Port Statistics Overview Port Statistics Overview Auto refresh C Parameter description eo Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Packets The number of received and transmitted packets per port o Bytes The number of received and transmitted bytes per port eo Errors The number of frames received in error and the number of incomplete transmissions per port e Drops 40 The number of frames discarded due to ingress or egress congestion eo Filtered The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device wil
44. Priority DSCP Delete D Voice v Tazza 1 0 lo g Parameter description Fast start repeat count Rapid startup and Emergency Call Service Location Identification Discovery of endpoints is a critically important aspect of VoIP systems in general In addition it is best to advertise only those pieces of information which are specifically relevant to particular endpoint types for example only advertise the voice network policy to permitted voice capable devices both in order to conserve the limited LLDPU space and to reduce security and system integrity issues that can come with inappropriate knowledge of the network policy With this in mind LLDP MED defines an LLDP MED Fast Start interaction between the protocol and the application layers on top of the protocol in order to achieve these related properties Initially a Network Connectivity Device will only transmit LLDP TLVs in an LLDPDU Only after an LLDP MED Endpoint Device is detected will an LLDP MED capable Network Connectivity Device start to advertise LLDP MED TLVs in outgoing LLDPDUs on the associated port The LLDP MED application will temporarily speed up the transmission of the LLDPDU to start within a second when a new LLDP MED neighbour has been detected in order share LLDP MED information as fast as possible to new neighbours Because there is a risk of an LLDP frame being lost during transmission between neighbours it is recomm
45. QoS and performance e EEE802 3ah MAC layer OAM EEE802 1ag Ethernet CFM ITU T Y 1731 Ethernet OAM Performance Monitoring ITU T G 8031 8032 Ethernet Linear Protection Ethernet Ring Protection Switching e Support 20 Port 100M 1G SFP Fiber high density for scalable connect requirement e Support 4 port Combo GbE RJ 45 100M 1G SFP for flexible connection requirement e Support 4 port 1OGbE 1G 10G SFP for high speed backbone uplink requirement e Support 1 port GbE RJ 45 for out of band management requirement e Support IPv4 lPv6 dual stack management e Support SSH SSL secured management e Support SNMP v1 v2c v3 e Support RMON groups 1 2 3 9 e Support sFlow e Support IGMP v1 v2 v3 Snooping e Support MLD v1 v2 Snooping e Support RADIUS and TACACS authentication e Support IP Source Guard Support DHCP Relay Option 82 e Support DHCP Snooping e Support ACL and QCL for traffic filtering e Support 802 1d STP 802 1w RSTP and 802 1s MSTP e Support LACP and static link aggregation e Support Q in Q double tag VLAN e Support GVRP dynamic VLAN Support AC 100 240VAC and DC 48VDC dual power input for power redundancy application Overview of this user s manual Chapter 1 Operation of Web based Management Chapter 2 System Configuration Chapter 3 Configuration Chapter 4 Security Chapter 5 Maintenance Operation of Web based Management Initial Configuratio
46. Shows the identity of the supplicant as received in the Response Identity EAPOL frame Clicking the link causes the supplicant s EAPOL and Backend Server counters to be shown in the Selected Counters table If no supplicants are attached it shows No supplicants attached This column is not available for MAC based Auth e MAC Address For Multi 802 1X this column holds the MAC address of the attached supplicant For MAC based Auth this column holds the MAC address of the attached client Clicking the link causes the client s Backend Server counters to be shown in the Selected Counters table If no clients are attached it shows No clients attached VLAN ID This column holds the VLAN ID that the corresponding client is currently secured through the Port Security module o State The client can either be authenticated or unauthenticated In the authenticated state it is allowed to forward frames on the port and in the unauthenticated state it is blocked As long as the backend server hasn t successfully authenticated the client it is unauthenticated If an authentication fails for one or the other reason the client will remain in the unauthenticated state for Hold Time seconds e Last Authentication Shows the date and time of the last authentication of the client successful as well as unsuccessful 265 e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper
47. System Information CPU Load 2 Display the CPU Load on the screen 3 Click Auto refresh Figure 2 1 3 CPU Load CPU Load Auto refresh Y 100ms 0 1sec 7 10sec 8 all numbers running average Parameter description e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the log automatically Gi Note The under from and to was displayed what you set on the From and To field information 2 2 Time This page configures the switch Time Time configure is including Time Configuration and NTP Configuration 2 2 1 Manual The switch provides manual and automatic ways to set the system time via NTP Manual setting is simple and you just input Year Month Day Hour Minute and Second within the valid value range indicated in each item Web Interface To configure Time in the web interface 1 Click Time Manual 2 Specify the Time parameter in manual parameters 3 Click Apply Figure 2 2 1 The time configuration Time Configuration Use Local Settings Clock S E platas Use NTP Server Local Time 2011 01 01 00 55 42 YYYY MM DD HH MM 5S Time Zone Offset 0 min Daylight Savings O Enable Time Set Offset min Range 1 1440 Default 60 Daylight Savings Type E Recurrin From YY YY MM DD HH MM To YY Y Y MM D
48. VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The Delete button can be used to undo the addition of new entry Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 160 3 11 2 VID Translation Mapping This session allows you to map VLAN ID to other VLAN ID for a particular Group ID Globally Web Interface To Display VID Translation Mapping table configured in the web interface 1 Click Configuration VLAN Translation and VID Translation Mapping 2 To click Add New Entry and specify Group ID VLAN ID and Translated to VID 3 Click Apply Figure 3 11 2 The Port to Group mapping table VLAN Translation Table Delete Group ID VLAN ID Translated to VID No VLAN Translation entry found Add New Entry Parameter description o Delete To delete a VLAN Translation Group database entry check this box The entry will be deleted on the switch during the next Apply e GrouplID A valid Group ID is an integer value from 1 to 28 A set of VLAN Translations are mapped to a group Id This way a port is mapped to a list of VLAN Translations easily by mapping it to a group Number of groups in a switch is equal to the number of ports present in this switch A port can be mapped to any of the groups
49. a DHCP Snooping Statistics Configuration in the web interface 1 Checked Auto refresh Figure 4 4 2 The DHCP Relay Statistics DHCP Relay Statistics Auto refresh C Server Statistics Transmit Transmit Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive to Error from Missing Missing Missing Bad Bad Server Server Agent Option Circuit ID Remote ID CircuitID Remote ID 0 0 0 0 of o o 0 Client Statistics Transmit Transmit Receive Receive Replace Keep Drop to Client Error from Client Agent Option Agent Option Agent Option Agent Option 0 0 0 0 0 o 0 Parameter description e Transmit to Server The number of packets that are relayed from client to server e Transmit Error The number of packets that resulted in errors while being sent to clients e Receive from Server The number of packets received from server e Receive Missing Agent Option The number of packets received without agent information options e Receive Missing Circuit ID The number of packets received with the Circuit ID option missing e Receive Missing Remote ID The number of packets received with the Remote ID option missing e Receive Bad Circuit ID The number of packets whose Circuit ID option did not match known circuit ID e Receive Bad Remote ID The number of packets whose Remote ID option did not match known Remote ID Client Statistics e Transmit to Client The number of relayed packets from
50. and UVID Currently we support the following VLAN user types CLI Web SNMP These are referred to as static NAS NAS provides port based authentication which involves communications between a Supplicant Authenticator and an Authentication Server MVRP Multiple VLAN Registration Protocol MVRP allows dynamic registration and deregistration of VLANs on ports on a VLAN bridged network GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP allows dynamic registration and deregistration of VLANs on ports on a VLAN bridged network Voice VLAN Voice VLAN is a VLAN configured specially for voice traffic typically originating from IP phones MVR MVR is used to eliminate the need to duplicate multicast traffic for subscribers in each VLAN Multicast traffic for all channels is sent only on a single multicast VLAN MSTP The 802 15 Multiple Spanning Tree protocol MSTP uses VLANs to create multiple spanning trees in a network which significantly improves network resource utilization while maintaining a loop free environment eo VLANID Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN VLAN Membership 145 The VLAN Membership Status Page shall show the current VLAN port members for all VLANs configured by a selected VLAN User selection shall be allowed by a Combo Box When ALL VLAN Users are selected it shall show this information for all the VLAN Users and this is by default VLAN membership allows the frames classified to the VLAN
51. and DSCP for the new policy Click Save e Port Policies Configuration Every port may advertise a unique set of network policies or different attributes for the same network policies based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration o Port The port number to which the configuration applies e Policy lid The set of policies that shall apply to a given port The set of policies is selected by check marking the checkboxes that corresponds to the policies O Buttons 130 Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 131 3 8 4 LLDP MED Neighbours This page provides a status overview of all LLDP MED neighbours The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbour is detected This function applies to VoIP devices which support LLDP MED The columns hold the following information Web Interface To show LLDP MED neighbours 1 Click LLDP MED Neighbours 2 Click Refresh for manual update web screen 3 Click Auto refresh for auto update web screen Figure 3 8 4 The LLDP MED Neighbours information LLDP MED Neighbour Information No LLDP MED neighbour information found Note If your network without any device supports LLDP MED then the table will show No LLDP MED neighbour information found Parameter description Port The port on which the LLDP frame was received e Device Type LLDP
52. and de registration of attribute values A GARP participation in a switch or an end station consists of a GARP application component and a GARP Information Declaration GID component associated with each port or the switch The propagation of information between GARP participants for the same application in a bridge is carried out by the GARP Information Propagation GIP component Protocol exchanges take place between GARP participants by means of LLC Type 1 services using the group MAC address and PDU format defined for the GARP application concerned 3 12 1 Configuration This page allows you to configure the basic GARP Configuration settings for all switch ports The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To configure GARP Port Configuration in the web interface 1 Click GARP configures 2 Specify GARP Configuration Parameters 3 Click Apply Figure 3 12 1 The GARP Port Configuration 162 GARP Port Configuration CM o C C C C C C C C C e C C 0 C C C C C C C 600 C 600 Parameter description Port 10000 ut AHHERER l A EEE ee BEEBE RHE EEE a a BARBERA gt Auto refresh E i z3 i 3 d i a i e i 2 i i lt i a i E i A i i K i ql lt ES d i k elie fic y i lt i w i 2 i zA i 2 i 3 i i 2 The Port co
53. be working with 3 2 1 Ports The section describes how to configure the ACL parameters ACE of the each switch port These parameters will affect frames received on a port unless the frame matches a specific ACE Web Interface To configure the ACL Ports Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration ACL then Ports 2 To scroll the specific parameter value to select the correct value for port ACL setting Click the Apply to save the setting If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the reset button It will revert to previously saved values 5 After you configure complete then you could see the Counter of the port then you could click refresh to update the counter or Clear the information Figure 3 2 1 The ACL Ports Configuration 49 ACL Ports Configuration gt e o i 0 Le o Pl Permit y CO EA oo Pmi oo Pmi 9 Pmi oo Pmi oo A oo Pmi oo Pmi oo Pmi oOo ey Enabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disab v Embed v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v gt e A Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Enabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled
54. by IPv6 routers to discover multicast listeners on a directly attached link much as IGMP is used in IPv4 The protocol is embedded in ICMPv6 instead of using a separate protocol Multicast VLAN Registration MVR is a protocol for Layer 2 IP networks that enables multicast traffic from a source VLAN to be shared with subscriber VLANs The main reason for using MVR is to save bandwidth by preventing duplicate multicast streams being sent in the core network instead the stream s are received on the MVR VLAN and forwarded to the VLANs where hosts have requested it them Wikipedia NAS is an acronym for Network Access Server The NAS is meant to act as a gateway to guard access to a protected source A client connects to the NAS and the NAS connects to another resource asking whether the client s supplied credentials are valid Based on the answer the NAS then allows or disallows access to the protected resource An example of a NAS implementation is IEEE 802 1X NetBIOS NFS NTP OAM NetBIOS is an acronym for Network Basic Input Output System It is a program that allows applications on separate computers to communicate within a Local Area Network LAN and it is not supported on a Wide Area Network WAN The NetBIOS giving each computer in the network both a NetBIOS name and an IP address corresponding to a different host name provides the session and transport services described in the Open Systems Interconnection OSI model
55. can form max 12 LLAGs per switch and 2 GLAGs per stack Key The Key value incurred by the port range 1 65535 The Auto setting will set the key as appropriate by the physical link speed LOMb 1 100Mb 2 1Gb 3 Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered Ports with the same Key value can participate in the same aggregation group while ports with different keys cannot Role The Role shows the LACP activity status The Active will transmit LACP packets each second while Passive will wait for a LACP packet from a partner speak if spoken to Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 69 3 3 2 2 System Status This section describes that when you complete to set LACP function on the switch then it provides a status overview for all LACP instances Web Interface To display the LACP System status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration LACP System Status 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the LACP System Status Figure 3 3 2 2 The LACP System Status LACP System Status Agar ID Partner Partner Last Local 99 System ID Key Changed Ports No ports enabled or no existing partners Parameter description e lt AggrID The Aggregation ID associated with this aggregation instance For LLAG the i
56. changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 87 3 4 6 Bridge Status After you complete the MSTI Port configuration the you could to ask the switch display the Bridge Status The Section provides a status overview of all STP bridge instances The displayed table contains a row for each STP bridge instance where the column displays the following information Web Interface To display the STP Bridges status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Spanning Tree STP Bridges 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the STP Bridges Figure 3 4 6 The STP Bridges status STP Bridges igi Brisas ID Port Cost Ea P ai CIST 80 00 00 40 C7 9E 07 D0 80 00 00 40 C7 9E 07 D0 0 Steady Parameter description o MSTI The Bridge Instance This is also a link to the STP Detailed Bridge Status e Bridge ID The Bridge ID of this Bridge instance e RootID The Bridge ID of the currently elected root bridge e Root Port The switch port currently assigned the root port role e Root Cost Root Path Cost For the Root Bridge it is zero For all other Bridges it is the sum of the Port Path Costs on the least cost path to the Root Bridge Topology Flag The current state of the Topology Change Flag of this Bridge instance Topology Change Last The time
57. contains more than one The following description defines these privilege level groups in details System Contact Name Location Timezone Log Security Authentication System Access Management Port contains Dotlx port MAC based and the MAC Address Limit ACL HTTPS SSH ARP Inspection and IP source guard IP Everything except ping Port Everything except VeriPHY Diagnostics ping and VeriPHY Maintenance CLI System Reboot System Restore Default System Password Configuration Save Configuration Load and Firmware Load Web Users Privilege Levels and everything in Maintenance Debug Only present in CLI Privilege Levels Every group has an authorization Privilege level for the following sub groups configuration read only configuration execute read write status statistics read only status statistics read write e g for clearing of statistics User Privilege should be same or greater than the authorization Privilege level to have the access to that group 2 4 IP IP is an acronym for Internet Protocol It is a protocol used for communicating data across an internet network IP is a best effort system which means that no packet of information sent over is assured to reach its destination in the same condition it was sent Each device connected to a Local Area Network LAN or Wide Area Network WAN is given an Internet Protocol address and this IP address is used to identify the device uniquely amo
58. costes Maske eee 254 AIDA WUCA SIGs A A A a tata here das 262 ES SN hetica tec ou E ies AEA EEA E ck Bek AEE RCE AB aa BA eR A 264 AGARRAR E a Pisce te tec Deas ba tel Sed ea Sav tes Betas os Wada E aaa Gs 267 AOL Configuration cies tes A Beta ie Aas na Nan dah cia Asan head 267 4 0 2 Radins OVerViEW soren nene A 272 46 3 RAGIUS De E a e E a a a e a va E a ce Eae EEEa 274 AT PORT SECURE E NEET 275 ATT O cad 275 IA E A A ON 278 ES EN ARA RP E AOE E PO 280 4 8 ACCESS MANAGEMEN Tos cea ie ceven neoncnnhasuee a a r N s 281 ALS LICON TZUT AO A AS 281 EL A iS PO 283 ASO SSS RO EE EAE ante 284 AKON S A BA BPS sie het RR NE 285 4 11 AUTH METHOD ii ii tien 286 MAINTENANC Biiisccsecsiscissssssssscst enssosscccsoss sssasssenssosvdcvessessces cdecesosdvaieccssbasd sedoessotsdesesevtacssesessed sedsossesesssestets 287 Sl RESTARTIDEVICE amp sec Soc Vers sc oa Sev A A Os a ee BERR 287 DED FIRMWARE nan cede n N suse e a ea dla ple 288 522 1 Firmware Up grade dia 288 5 22 Fir LCR A AAA AR ES OEA 289 IN AVE RESTORE A a a a ES RE 291 DB AP AClORY Defaults iniciar A A A sata 291 D2 322 WAVE A OT 292 DDE NA A ROA 293 5 3 4 Restore SEP A ikra rr CEoEEN A TEE ENNES IENE OE TESO EERTECO EENE SEES oraaa Na EATE EEEN E 5 4 EXPORT IMPORT o aie dile RS EES candace visser ar ea EAEn dd ve anaes DIALEXDON Coli dad id Eni DAZ AMPONE CON Bi diia diodo 5 5 DIAGMOSTIGS ui de da ages vil Release Revision History Date Revision V1 31
59. counts the number of symbol errors that occurred during the specified period The period is specified by the number of symbols that can be received in a time interval on the underlying physical layer This event is generated if the symbol error count is equal to or greater than the specified threshold for that period Frame Period Error Event 217 The Errored Frame Period Event TLV counts the number of errored frames detected during the specified period The period is specified by a number of received frames This event is generated if the errored frame count is greater than or equal to the specified threshold for that period for example if the errored frame count is greater than or equal to 10 for the last 1 000 000 frames received Errored frames are frames that had transmission errors as detected at the Media Access Control sublayer Window 100 msec The parameter was using for represents the window period in the order of 100 msec for the observation of various link events Period Threshold The parameter was using for represents the threshold value for the window period for the appropriate Link event so as to notify the peer of this error RxPacket Threshold The parameter was using for represents the threshold value for the window paeriod for the errors in the received packets so as to notify the peer of this error Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically
60. electronic hardware the one after the hyphen is the version of mechanical Serial number The serial number is assigned by the Manufacture Host IP address The IP address of the switch Subnet Mask Displays the IP subnet mask assigned to the device Gateway IP Address Displays the default gateway IP address assigned to the device Host MAC Address Displays the Ethernet MAC address assigned to the device Console Baudrate Displays the baudrate of RS232 COM port RAM Size Displays the RAM size of the system Flash Size Displays the flash size of the system Bridge FDB Size Displays the bridge forwarding database size of the device e Transmit Queue Displays the information about switch s transmit priority queue e Maximum Frame Size Displays the information about switch supported maximum frame size e Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals 2 1 2 Configuration You can identify the system by configuring the contact information name and location of the switch Web interface To configure System Information in the web interface 1 Click System System Information Configuration 2 Entry System Contact System Name System Location information in this page 3 Click Apply Figure 2 1 2 System Information configuration System Information Configuration Comtat Device Name SW2AGFATG Location Apply Parameter description
61. entry should belong to Possible view types are included An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be included excluded An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be excluded In general if a view entry s view type is excluded there should be another view entry existing with view type as included and it s OID subtree should 29 overstep the excluded view entry e OID Subtree The OID defining the root of the subtree to add to the named view The allowed OID length is 1 to 128 The allowed string content is digital number or asterisk e Apply To click the Save icon to save the configuration to ROM 30 2 6 7 Access The function is used to configure SNMPv3 accesses The Entry index key are Group Name Security Model and Security level To create a new access account please check lt Add new access gt button and enter the access information then check lt Save gt Max Group Number 14 Web Interface To display the configure SNMP Access in the web interface 1 Click SNMP Accesses 2 Click Add new Access 3 Specify the SNMP Access parameters 4 Click Apply 5 If you want to modify or clear the setting then click Reset Figure 2 6 7 The SNMP Accesses Configuration SNMPv3 Accesses Configuration Delete oup Name Security Model Security Level Read View Name Write View Name Apply SNMPv3 Accesses Configuration Delete Group Name
62. for people or computers to connect and use a network service RDI RDI is an acronym for Remote Defect Indication It is a OAM functionallity that is used by a MEP to indicate defect detected to the remote peer MEP RSTP In 1998 the IEEE with document 802 1w introduced an evolution of STP the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol which provides for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change Standard IEEE 802 1D 2004 now incorporates RSTP and obsoletes STP while at the same time being backwards compatible with STP SHA 312 SHA is an acronym for Secure Hash Algorithm It designed by the National Security Agency NSA and published by the NIST as a U S Federal Information Processing Standard Hash algorithms compute a fixed length digital representation known as a message digest of an input data sequence the message of any length Shaper Ashaper can limit the bandwidth of transmitted frames It is located after the ingress queues SMTP SMTP is an acronym for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol It is a text based protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides a mail service modeled on the FTP file transfer service SMTP transfers mail messages between systems and notifications regarding incoming mail SNAP The SubNetwork Access Protocol SNAP is a mechanism for multiplexing on networks using IEEE 802 2 LLC more protocols than can be distinguished by the 8 bit 802 2 Service Access Point SAP fields SNA
63. frame TCP TCP is an acronym for Transmission Control Protocol It is a communications protocol that uses the Internet Protocol IP to exchange the messages between computers The TCP protocol guarantees reliable and in order delivery of data from sender to receiver and distinguishes data for multiple connections by concurrent applications for example Web server and e mail server running on the same host The applications on networked hosts can use TCP to create connections to one another It is known as a connection oriented protocol which means that a connection is established and maintained until such time as the message or messages to be exchanged by the application programs at each end have been exchanged TCP is responsible for ensuring that a message is divided into the packets that IP manages and for reassembling the packets back into the complete message at the other end Common network applications that use TCP include the World Wide Web WWW e mail and File Transfer Protocol FTP TELNET TELNET is an acronym for TELetype NETwork It is a terminal emulation protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides a virtual connection between TELNET server and TELNET client TELNET enables the client to control the server and communicate with other servers on the network To start a Telnet session the client user must log in to a server by entering a valid username and password Then the client user can ente
64. frame period errors 0 Total frame period error events D Total frame period error events 0 Local Symbol Period Status Remote Symbol Period Status Symbol Period Error Event Timestamp O Symbol Period Error Event Timestamp 0 Symbol Period Error Event Window D Symbol Period Error Event Window 0 Symbol Period Error Event Threshold 0 Symbol Period Error Event Threshold 0 Symbol Period Errors O Symbol Period Errors 0 Symbol frame period errors D Symbol frame period errors 0 Symbol frame period error events O Symbol frame period error events 0 Local Event Seconds Summary Status Remote Event Seconds Summary Status Event Seconds Summary Time Stamp D Event Seconds Summary Time Stamp 0 Event Seconds Summary Window D Event Seconds Summary Window 0 Event Seconds Summary Threshold D Event Seconds Summary Threshold 0 Event Seconds Summary Events O Event Seconds Summary Events 0 Event Seconds Summary Error Total D Event Seconds Summary Error Total 0 Event Seconds Summary Event Total D Event Seconds Summary Event Total 0 Parameter description Port Frame Error Event Timestamp J Frame Error Event Window o Frame Error Event threshold upper bound is one minute 221 You can scroll to select which port you want to monitor detailed Link OAM events It shows the switch port number The field shows this two octet field indicates the time reference when the event was generated in terms of 100 ms intervals The fiel
65. in the stack restart the switch restarts WARNING While the firmware is being updated Web access appears to be defunct The front LED flashes Green Off with a frequency of 10 Hz while the firmware update is in progress Do not restart or power off the device at this time or the switch may fail to function afterwards 288 5 2 2 Firmware Selection Due to the switch supports Dual image for firmware redundancy purpose You can select what firmware image for your device start firmware or operating firmware This page provides information about the active and alternate backup firmware images in the device and allows you to revert to the alternate image Web Interface To configure a Firmware Selection in the web interface 1 Chick Activate Alternate I mage 2 Click yes to complete firmware selection Figure 5 2 2 The Firmware Selection Software Image Selection Active Image Image managed Version SW24GFATG standalone v1 29 Date 2012 12 19T16 16 04 08 00 Alternate Image Image managed bk Version SW24GFA4TG standalone v1 26 Date 2012 12 07710 06 07 08 00 Rate eae ase fc Are you sure you wantto activate the alternate software image Parameter description e Activate Alternate Image Click to use the alternate image This button may be disabled depending on system state e Cancel Cancel activating the backup image Navigates away from this pag
66. in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS QoS Control List Click the to add a new QoS Control List Scroll all parameters and evoke the Port Member to join the QCE rules Click the Apply to save the setting If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button DABAN It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 14 11 The QoS Control List Configuration QoS Control List Configuration Frame Action QCE Port SMAC DMAC VID PCP DEI Type Class DPL DSC QCE Configuration Port Members 1 2 3 J4 5 6 7 8 9 10 41 12 13 44 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 mlml al ml al MIMI ml alm ml alm lal ml Mm mlml mlml mla ml alm l Mlm Key Parameters Action Parameters Tag Any Class 0 vi VID Any w DPL Default v PCP Any v DSCP Default v DEI Any v SMAC Any w DMAC Type Any v Frame Type Any v Lanas Reset coca Parameter description e QCE Indicates the index of QCE Port Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE e Frame Type Indicates the type of frame to look for incoming frames Possible frame types are Any The QCE will match all frame type 189 Ethernet Only Ethernet frames with Ether Type 0x600 0xF FFF
67. is done automatically as soon as a frame with unknown SMAC is received e Disable No learning is done e Secure Only static MAC entries are learned all other frames are dropped 138 O Note Make sure that the link used for managing the switch is added to the Static Mac Table before changing to secure learning mode otherwise the management link is lost and can only be restored by using another non secure port or by connecting to the switch via the serial interface Static MAC Table Configuration The static entries in the MAC table are shown in this table The static MAC table can contain 64 entries The maximum of 64 entries is for the whole stack and not per switch The MAC table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by MAC address e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e VLANID The VLAN ID of the entry e MAC Address The MAC address of the entry e Port Members Checkmarks indicate which ports are members of the entry Check or uncheck as needed to modify the entry e Adding a New Static Entry Click to add a new entry to the static MAC table Specify the VLAN ID MAC address and port members for the new entry Click Save e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 139 3 9 2 Dynamic MAC Table Entries in the MAC Table are shown on this page The MAC Table contains up to 8192 en
68. is selected for the sender IP filter you can enter a specific sender P address in dotted decimal notation eo Sender IP Mask When Network is selected for the sender IP filter you can enter a specific sender IP mask in dotted decimal notation Target IP Filter Specify the target IP filter for this specific ACE Any No target IP filter is specified Target IP filter is don t care Host Target IP filter is set to Host Specify the target IP address in the Target IP Address field that appears Network Target IP filter is set to Network Specify the target IP address and target IP mask in the Target IP Address and Target IP Mask fields that appear e Target IP Address When Host or Network is selected for the target IP filter you can enter a specific target IP address in dotted decimal notation e Target IP Mask When Network is selected for the target IP filter you can enter a specific target IP mask in dotted decimal notation e ARP SMAC Match Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their sender hardware address field SHA settings 0 ARP frames where SHA is not equal to the SMAC address 1 ARP frames where SHA is equal to the SMAC address Any Any value is allowed don t care e RARP DMAC Match Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their target hardware address field THA settings O RARP frames where THA is not equal to the DMAC address 1 RARP frames where T
69. lt gt gt You can click them Refreshes the displayed table starting from the VLAN input fields Or click lt lt to update the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID Others click gt gt to update the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 96 3 5 3 Port Group Filtering The section describes how to set the IGMP Port Group Filtering With the IGMP filtering feature an user can exert this type of control In some network Application environments as like the metropolitan or multiple dwelling unit MDU installations an user might want to control the multicast groups to which a user on a switch port can belong It allows the user to control the distribution of multicast services such as IP TV based on some type of subscription or service plan With this feature you can filter multicast joins on a per port basis by configuring IP multicast profiles and associating them with individual switch ports An IGMP profile can contain one or more multicast groups and specifies whether access to the group is permitted or denied If an IGMP profile denying access to a multicast group is applied to a switch port the IGMP join report requesting the stream of IP multicast traffic is dropped and the port is not allowed to receive IP multicast traffic from that group If the filtering action permits access to the multicast group the IGMP report
70. multicast traffic destined for a given multicast address it forwards that traffic only to ports on the VLAN that have MLD hosts for that address It drops that traffic for ports on the VLAN that have no MLD hosts The will use the last entry of the currently displayed entry as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the button to start over Web Interface To configure the MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration 2 Specify the VLAN ID with entries per page 3 Click Refresh to refresh an entry of the MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration Information 4 Click lt lt or gt gt to move to previous or next entry Figure 3 7 2 The MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration Refresh 1 Start from VLAN with o entries per page VLAN ID Snooping Enabled MLD Querier Compatibility RV QI sec QRI 0 1 sec LLQI 0 1 sec URI sec 1 O a Apply Parameter description e VLANID The VLAN ID of the entry Snooping Enabled Enable the per VLAN MLD Snooping Only up to 32 VLANs can be selected MLD Querier A router sends MLD Query messages onto a particular link This Router is called the Querier Enable the MLD Querier in the VLAN Compatibility Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appropr
71. must be a member of both a VLAN and a Private VLAN to be able to forward packets By default all ports are VLAN unaware and members of VLAN 1 and Private VLAN 1 A VLAN unaware port can only be a member of one VLAN but it can be a member of multiple Private VLANs Web Interface To configure Private VLAN configuration in the web interface 1 Click add new Private VLAN configuration 2 Specify the Private VLAN ID and Port Members 3 Click Apply Figure 3 10 5 1 The Private VLAN Membership Configuration Private VLAN Membership Configuration Port Members Delete PVLAN ID D 1 Parameter description Oo Delete To delete a private VLAN entry check this box The entry will be deleted during the next save e Private VLAN ID Indicates the ID of this particular private VLAN e Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each private VLAN ID To include a port in a Private VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the Private VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked e Adding a New Private VLAN Click to add a new private VLAN ID An empty row is added to the table and the private VLAN can be configured as needed e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 149 3 10 5 2 Port Isolation Port Isolation provides for an appar
72. on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward If only one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise The status page is divided into two sections one with a legend of user modules and one with the actual port status Web Interface To configure a Port Security Switch Status Configuration in the web interface 1 Checked Auto refresh Figure 4 7 2 The Port Security Switch Status Port Security Switch Status User Module Legend User Module Name Abbr DHCP Snooping D Port Status isabled isabled isabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled l l l E m 278 Parameter description User Module Legend The legend shows all user modules that may request Port Security services User Module Name The full name of a module that may request Port Security services Abbr A one letter abbreviation of the user module This is used in the Users column in the port status table Port Status The table has one row for each port on the selec
73. perform QoS related configuration for voice data ensuring the transmission priority of voice traffic and voice quality 316
74. right icon Refresh Clear You can click them for refresh the NAS Statistics by manual Others you can click clear to clean up all entries 266 4 6 AAA This section shows you to use an AAA Authentication Authorization and Accounting server to provide access control to your network The AAA server can be a TACACS or RADIUS server to create and manage objects that contain settings for using AAA servers 4 6 1 Configuration This section describes how to configure AAA setting of TACACS or RADIUS server Web Interface To configure a Common Configuration of AAA in the web interface 1 Set Timeout Default is 15 seconds 2 Set Dead Time Default is 300 seconds To configure a TACACS Authorization and Accounting Configuration of AAA in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Authorization 2 Select Enabled in the Failback to Local Authorization 3 Select Enabled in the Account To configure a RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration of AAA in the web interface 1 Check Enabled 2 Specify IP address or Hostname for Radius Server 3 Specify Authentication Port for Radius Server Default is 1812 4 Specify the Secret with Radius Server To configure a RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration of AAA in the web interface 1 Check Enabled 2 Specify IP address or Hostname for Radius Server 3 Specify Accounting Port for Radius Server Default is 1813 4 Specify the Secre
75. ring with virtual channel No indicates sub ring doesn t have virtual channel Major Ring ID Major ring group ID for the interconnected sub ring It is used to send topology change updates on major ring If ring is major this value is same as the protection group ID of this ring Alarm There is an active alarm on the ERPS When you complete the setting then switch will show the alarm status Buttons Add new ERPS Click to add a new ERPS entry Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the refresh information by manual 231 3 24 PTP For Ethernet application that PTP is an acronym for Precision Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems The chapter describes the user to configure and inspect the current PTP clock settings 3 24 1 Configuration This chapter allows the user to configure the PTP clock setting on the switch and the parameters setting values Web Interface To configure the PTP in the web interface 1 Click Configuration PTP then Configuration 2 Scroll to select PTP External clock mode includes One_PPS_Mode External Enable VCXO Enable Assign the clock frequency parameter Click Add New PTP Clock to create a new PTP entry Click the Applyto save the setting Or OW ee If you want to cancel the setting then you
76. save o Port The logical port for the settings You can evoke to enable the port to join filtering Group e Filtering Groups The IP Multicast Group that will be filtered e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 109 3 6 4 Status The section describes when you complete the MLD Snooping and how to display the MLD Snooping Status and detail information It will help you to find out the detail information of MLD Snooping status Web Interface To display the MLD Snooping Status in the web interface 1 2 Click Configuration MLD Snooping Status If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh Click Refresh to refresh a entry of the MLD Snooping Status Information Click Clear to clear the MLD Snooping Status Figure 3 6 4 The MLD Snooping Status MLD Snooping Status Statistics Auto refresh VLAN ID Querier Host Version Version Querier Status Queries Transmitted Queries Received V1 Reports Received V2 Reports Received V1 Leaves Received Port Status Router Port Parameter description e VLANID The VLAN ID of the entry e Querier Version 110 Working Querier Version currently Host Version Working Host Versio
77. scheduler mode is Strict Priority or Weighted on this switch port e Queue Shaper Enable Controls whether the queue shaper is enabled for this queue on this switch port e Queue Shaper Rate Controls the rate for the queue shaper The default value is This value is restricted to 1000000 when the Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 when the Unit is Mbps e Queue Shaper Unit Controls the unit of measure for the queue shaper rate as kbps or Mbps The default value is kbps e Queue Shaper Excess 178 Controls whether the queue is allowed to use excess bandwidth Queue Scheduler Weight Controls the weight for this queue The default value is 17 This value is restricted to 1 100 This parameter is only shown if Scheduler Mode is set to Weighted Queue Scheduler Percent Shows the weight in percent for this queue This parameter is only shown if Scheduler Mode is set to Weighted Port Shaper Enable Controls whether the port shaper is enabled for this switch port Port Shaper Rate Controls the rate for the port shaper The default value is This value is restricted to 1000000 when the Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 when the Unit is Mbps Port Shaper Unit Controls the unit of measure for the port shaper rate as kbps or Mbps The default value is kbps Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and rev
78. syslog parameters includes IP Address of Syslog server and Port number Evoke the Sylog to enable it Click Apply Figure2 5 1 The System Log configuration System Log Configuration Apply Parameter description e Server Mode Indicates the server mode operation When the mode operation is enabled the syslog message will send out to syslog server The syslog protocol is based on UDP communication and received on UDP port 514 and the syslog server will not send acknowledgments back sender since UDP is a connectionless protocol and it does not provide acknowledgments The syslog packet will always send out even if the syslog server does not exist Possible modes are Enabled Enable server mode operation Disabled Disable server mode operation e Server Address 1 and 2 Indicates the IPv4 host addresses of syslog server 1 and server 2 For redundancy If the switch provide DNS feature it also can be a host name Syslog Level Indicates what kind of message will send to syslog server Possible modes are Info Send information warnings and errors Warning Send warnings and errors Error Send errors 2 5 2 Log This section describes that display the system log information of the switch Web Interface To display the log configuration in the web interface 1 Click Syslog Log 2 Display the log information Figure2 5 2 The System Log configuration System Log Information Level al
79. that the LLDP information isn t valid anymore Tx Reinit controls the amount of seconds between the shutdown frame and a new LLDP initialization Valid values are restricted to 1 10 seconds LLDP Port Configuration The LLDP port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Port The switch port number of the logical LLDP port Mode Select LLDP mode Rx only The switch will not send out LLDP information but LLDP information from neighbor units is analyzed Tx only The switch will drop LLDP information received from neighbors but will send out LLDP information Disabled The switch will not send out LLDP information and will drop LLDP information received from neighbors Enabled The switch will send out LLDP information and will analyze LLDP information received from neighbors CDP Aware Select CDP awareness The CDP operation is restricted to decoding incoming CDP frames The switch doesn t transmit CDP frames CDP frames are only decoded if LLDP on the port is enabled Only CDP TLVs that can be mapped to a corresponding field in the LLDP neighbors table are decoded All other TLVs are discarded Unrecognized CDP TLVs and discarded CDP frames are not shown in the LLDP statistics CDP TLVs are mapped onto LLDP neighbors table as shown below CDP TLV Device ID is mapped to the LLDP Chassis ID field CDP TLV Address is mapped to the LLDP Management Address fie
80. then the device will refresh the information automatically Resolve Conflict Click it to resolve the conflict issue Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the QCL information by manual 194 3 14 13 Storm Control The section allows user to configure the Storm control for the switch There is a unicast storm rate control multicast storm rate control and a broadcast storm rate control These only affect flooded frames i e frames with a VLAN ID DMAC pair not present on the MAC Address table The configuration indicates the permitted packet rate for unicast multicast or broadcast traffic across the switch Web Interface To configure the Storm Control Configuration parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS Storm Control Configuration 2 Evoke to select the frame type to enable storm control 3 Scroll to set the Rate Parameters 4 Click the Apply to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 14 13 The Storm Control Configuration QoS Port Storm Control de El dB El El an ss fis Ei i El y 3 F A F A F A pA Ea E E EA EA E ES ss ES fs ES E lt lt d lt H E3 J A J k J A A etete EI ES ES ES ES ES ES ES k i El i El Ea z a a a a z z z z a ole E a z z z z z a a a a 3 Bl EEEE Y e
81. this port e Weight Qn Shows the weight for this queue and port e Scheduler Mode Controls whether the scheduler mode is Strict Priority or Weighted on this switch port Queue Shaper Enable Controls whether the queue shaper is enabled for this queue on this switch port e Queue Shaper Rate Controls the rate for the queue shaper The default value is This value is restricted to 1000000 when the Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 when the Unit is Mbps e Queue Shaper Unit Controls the unit of measure for the queue shaper rate as kbps or Mbps The default value is kbps e Queue Shaper Excess Controls whether the queue is allowed to use excess bandwidth e Queue Scheduler Weight Controls the weight for this queue The default value is 17 This value is restricted to 1 100 This parameter is only shown if Scheduler Mode is set to Weighted e Queue Scheduler Percent Shows the weight in percent for this queue This parameter is only shown if Scheduler 175 Mode is set to Weighted Port Shaper Enable Controls whether the port shaper is enabled for this switch port Port Shaper Rate Controls the rate for the port shaper The default value is This value is restricted to 1000000 when the Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 when the Unit is Mbps Port Shaper Unit Controls the unit of measure for the port shaper rate as kbps or Mbps The default value
82. to build the bandwidth aggregation For example if there are three Fast Ethernet ports aggregated in a logical port then this logical port has bandwidth three times as high as a single Fast Ethernet port has 3 3 1 Static Trunk The Aggregation Configuration is used to configure the settings of Link Aggregation You can bundle more than one port with the same speed full duplex and the same MAC to be a single logical port thus the logical port aggregates the bandwidth of these ports This means you can apply your current Ethernet equipment s to build the bandwidth aggregation 3 3 1 1 Static Trunk Ports using Static Trunk as their trunk method can choose their unique Static GroupID to form a logic trunked port The benefit of using Static Trunk method is that a port can immediately become a member of a trunk group without any handshaking with its peer port This is also a disadvantage because the peer ports of your static trunk group may not know that they should be aggregate together to form a logic trunked port Using Static Trunk on both end of a link is strongly recommended Please also note that low speed links will stay in not ready state when using static trunk to aggregate with high speed links Web Interface To configure the Trunk Aggregation Hash mode and Aggregation Group in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Static Trunk and then Aggregation Mode Configuration 2 Evoke to enable or disable the a
83. to click the Reset A Pe a button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 14 8 The DSCP Based QoS Ingress Classification Configuration DSCP Based QoS Ingress Classification gt E o T 0 o 8 o 8 oE o 8 o 8 o 8 oE 0 o 8 T 0 T o 0 o o 8 SEEEEEEEEEEEELEEELEE 184 Parameter description e DSCP Maximum number of support ed DSCP values are 64 e Trust Click to check if the DSCP value is trusted e QoS Class QoS Class value can be any of 0 7 e DPL Drop Precedence Level 0 3 e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 185 3 14 9 DSCP Translation The section describes the switch allows you to configure the basic QoS DSCP Translation settings for all switches DSCP translation can be done in Ingress or Egress Web Interface To configure the DSCP Translation parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS DSCP Translation 2 Scroll to set the Ingress Translate and Egress Remap DPO and Remap DP1 Parameters Evoke to enable or disable Classify 4 Click the Apply to save the setting If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 14 9 The DSCP Translation Configuration DSCP Translation S pod fie una to f e al 2 lt lt lt od lt lt lt lt J Un Lo fito o F a
84. topology has been established all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units transmitted from the Root Bridge If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval Maximum Age the bridge assumes that the link to the Root Bridge is down This bridge will then initiate negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to reestablish a valid network topology 3 4 1 Bridge Settings The section describes that how to configure the Spanning Tree Bridge and STP System settings It allows you to configure STP System settings are used by all STP Bridge instance in the Switch Stack Web Interface To configure the Spanning Tree Bridge Settings parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Spanning Tree Bridge Settings 2 Scoll to select the parameters and write down available value of parameters in blank field in Basic Settings 3 Evoke to enable or disable the parameters and write down available value of parameters in blank field in Advanced settings 4 Click the save to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values 75 Figure 3 4 1 The STP Bridge Configuration STP Bridge Configuration Basic Settings Protocol Version Bridge Priority Forward Delay Maximum Hop Count Transmit Hold Count Advanced Settings Edge Port BPDU Filtering Edge Port BPDU Guard Port Error Recovery
85. transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames If the number of transmissions of such frames exceeds Max Reauth Count and no EAPOL frames have been received in the meanwhile the switch considers entering the Guest VLAN The interval between transmission of EAPOL Request Identity frames is configured with EAPOL Timeout If Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is enabled the port will now be placed in the Guest VLAN If disabled the switch will first check its history to see if an EAPOL frame has previously been received on the port this history is cleared if the port link goes down or the port s Admin State is changed and if not the port will be placed in the Guest VLAN Otherwise it will not move to the Guest VLAN but continue transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames at the rate given by EAPOL Timeout 260 Once in the Guest VLAN the port is considered authenticated and all attached clients on the port are allowed access on this VLAN The switch will not transmit an EAPOL Success frame when entering the Guest VLAN While in the Guest VLAN the switch monitors the link for EAPOL frames and if one such frame is received the switch immediately takes the port out of the Guest VLAN and starts authenticating the supplicant according to the port mode If an EAPOL frame is received the port will never be able to go back into the Guest VLAN if the Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is disabled eo Port State The current state of the port It can und
86. using a secure channel between two networked devices The encryption used by SSH provides confidentiality and integrity of data over an insecure network The goal of SSH was to replace the earlier rlogin TELNET and rsh protocols which did not provide strong authentication or guarantee confidentiality Wikipedia SSM SSM In SyncE this is an abbreviation for Synchronization Status Message and is containing a QL indication 313 STP Spanning Tree Protocol is an OSI layer 2 protocol which ensures a loop free topology for any bridged LAN The original STP protocol is now obsolete by RSTP Switch ID Switch IDs 1 16 are used to uniquely identify the switches within a stack The Switch ID of each switch is shown on the display on the front of the switch and is used widely in the web pages as well as in the CLI commands SyncE SyncE Is an abbreviation for Synchronous Ethernet This functionality is used to make a network clock frequency synchronized Not to be confused with real time clock synchronized IEEE 1588 T TACACS TACACS is an acronym for Terminal Acess Controller Access Control System Plus It is a networking protocol which provides access control for routers network access servers and other networked computing devices via one or more centralized servers TACACS provides separate authentication authorization and accounting services Tag Priority Tag Priority is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 1Q
87. will be ignored 2 6 1 System This section describes how to configure SNMP System on the switch This function is used to configure SNMP settings community name trap host and public traps as well as the throttle of SNMP A SNMP manager must pass the authentication by identifying both community names and then it can access the MIB information of the target device So both parties must have the same community name Once completing the setting click lt Apply gt button the setting takes effect Web Interface To display the configure SNMP System in the web interface 1 Click SNMP System 2 Evoke SNMP State to enable or disable the SNMP function 3 Specify the Engine ID 4 Click Apply Figure2 6 1 The SNMP System Configuration SNMP System Configuration SNMP State Enable Disable Engine ID 200014 5503001085980740 Apply Parameter description These parameters are displayed on the SNMP System Configuration page SNMP State The term SNMP here The term SNMP here is used for the activation or de activation of SNMP Enable Enable SNMP state operation 22 Disable Disable SNMP state operation Default Enable e EngineID SNMPv3 engine ID syntax 0 9 a f A F min 5 octet max 32 octet fifth octet can t input 00 IF change the Engine ID that will clear all original user 23 2 6 2 Configuration The function is used to configure SNMP communities To enable a new community
88. you want to display the GVRP Counter information 3 Click Refresh to modify the GVRP statistics information Figure 3 13 2 The GVRP Port Statistics GVRP Port Statistics Port Join Tx Count Leave Tx Count i D D mn So mm e e e a ooo oo oo oo oo oo ooo o oo To ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo Parameter description Port The Port coulmn shows the list of ports for which you can see port counters and statistics e Join Tx Count explain Join tx Count here e Leave Tx Count explain Leave Tx Count here e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the GVRP Port Statistics information by manual 168 3 14 QoS The switch supports four QoS queues per port with strict or weighted fair queuing scheduling It supports QoS Control Lists QCL for advance programmable QoS classification based on IEEE 802 1p Ethertype VID IPv4 IPv6 DSCP and UDP TCP ports and ranges High flexibility in the classification of incoming frames to a QoS class The QoS classification looks for information up to Layer 4 including IPv4 and IPv6 DSCP IPv4 TCP UDP port numbers and user priority of tagged frames This QoS classification mechanism is implemented in a QoS control list QCL The QoS clas
89. 0 3 4 8 Port Statistics After you complete the STP configuration then you could to let the switch display the STP Statistics The Section provides you to ask switch to display the STP Statistics detail counters of bridge ports in the currently selected switch Web Interface To display the STP Port status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Spanning Tree Port Statistics 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the STP Bridges Figure 3 4 8 The STP Statistics STP Statistics Port Transmitted Received Discarded MSTP RSTP STP TCN MSTP RSTP STP TCN Unknown Illegal No ports enabled Parameter description Port The switch port number of the logical STP port MSTP The number of MSTP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port RSTP The number of RSTP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port eo STP The number of legacy STP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port eo TCN ae number of legacy Topology Change Notification BPDU s received transmitted on the port e Discarded Unknown The number of unknown Spanning Tree BPDU s received and discarded on the port e Discarded Illegal The number of illegal Soanning Tree BPDU s received and discarded on the port e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh to refresh the information auto
90. 0 0 OF OF 0 0 OF lO 0 OF 0 0 OF OF OJO lO JO OF OF OF OOOO O LO OF O10 0 O OF OF OF OF O O OF OF LO OO CO OF 0 OF O OO O10 O 0 OF OF 0 OF OF OF 0 OF OOO OF OJO OO OF OF OFF OF OOO OOO OF OF 01 OF O OF OF OF LO OJO LO OF 0 CO OOO OOO OLOLO LO LO LO LO LO LO LO LO OF OF OF LO OJO LO LO O OF OF LO OF OF OF OOO LO lO LO LO OF LO lO O lO lO OF OGC OF OO LO OF OF OOO OVO OO JO LO O lO lO O lO OF OO lO OO OF OF lO S OF OFF OF OF OOO LO lO lO OF OF OF lO lO OF OF OF O lO lO OO OJO lO OJO OF OF O1O O O10 0 OF 0 OF OF OJO O lO LO GIO O OF OJO lO O OF OF OF OO O O10 0 0 OF OF LO lO O OF OF lO GIO LO LO OF 0 O OF LO O OF OOO OLJOJOLO LO OO O10 0 LO OF 0 CO OF OF OC OF 0 OF 0 OO OF OF 0 OF OOOO lO lO OF OF lO OF 0 O OO CO OO OF OO OF 0 OJO OOO OLOLOLOLO LO 0 OF LO LO 0 OF OF LO LO LO LO OF OO OF JO LO LO OF OF O O OO 0 0 OF O O lO OF OF OF OF lO OF 0 OF OO OF OF OJO OF OF O OO OO 0 O OF O OO OF OF OF OF LO OF OF OF 0 Oo OF 0 OF OF OF OF O1O OO O 0 OF 0 0 O OF OF OF O OO O OF OO O OC OF O OF OF 0 0 OOO LO lO LO LO LO LO O OF OF OF LO LO LO LO OF 0 O OF 0 OJO OF OF OOO OO O O LO OO O OF lO OF LO lO O lO lO O lO lO OJO OF 0 OF OLOLO LO lO OO LO LO LO LO LO LO 0 LO LO LO LO ol ol ooo ooo 0 0 OOO OOO LO OF LO OO OJO OF LO O
91. 1 Click Configuration EVC Statistics 2 Choice which unit of data transmission receive you want to check 3 This page provides NNI port traffic statistics for the selected EVC It also shows counters for UNI ports of ECEs mapping to the EVC If you want to update the most new information please select Auto refresh EVC ID OFrames O Bytes O Both Clear Port Green Frames Yellow Frames Red Frames Discarded Frames Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Rx Tx Parameter description o Port The port number for which the configuration below applies Clear This box is used to mark a port for clearance in next Clear operation Port The UNI NNI port for the EVC Class Rx Green The number of green received Tx Green The number of green transmitted Rx Yellow The number of yellow received Tx Yellow The number of yellow transmitted Rx Red The number of red received Rx Discarded The number of discarded in the ingress queue system Tx Discarded The number of discarded in the egress queue system Green Discarded Yellow Discarded Buttons 202 G Frames Show frames statistics only G Bytes Show bytes statistics only G Both Show both frames and bytes statistics The port select box determines which port is affected by clicking the buttons Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately
92. 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Delete JODO O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 Parameter description e Delete To delete a Group Name to VLAN map entry check this box The entry will be deleted on the switch during the next Save e Group Name A valid Group Name is a string of atmost 16 characters which consists of a combination of alphabets a z or A Z and integers 0 9 no special character is allowed whichever Group name you try map to a VLAN must be present in Protocol to Group mapping table and must not be preused by any other existing mapping entry on this page VLAN ID Indicates the ID to which Group Name will be mapped A valid VLAN ID ranges from 1 4095 Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each Group Name to VLAN ID mapping To include a port in a mapping check the box To remove or exclude the port from the mapping make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked 157 Adding a New Group to VLAN mapping entry Click to add a new entry in mapping table An empty row is added to the table the Group Name VLAN ID and port members can be configured as needed Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The button can be used to undo the addition of new entry Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh
93. 2868 and RFC3580 form the basis for the attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID in an Access Accept packet The following criteria are used The Tunnel Medium Type Tunnel Type and Tunnel Private Group ID attributes must all be present at least once in the Access Accept packet e The switch looks for the first set of these attributes that have the same Tag value and fulfil the following requirements if Tag 0 is used the Tunnel Private Group ID does not need to include a Tag Value of Tunnel Medium Type must be set to IEEE 802 ordinal 6 Value of Tunnel Type must be set to VLAN ordinal 13 Value of Tunnel Private Group ID must be a string of ASCII chars in the range 0 9 which is interpreted as a decimal string representing the VLAN ID Leading O s are discarded The final value must be in the range 1 4095 e Guest VLAN Enabled When Guest VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled checked for a given port the switch considers moving the port into the Guest VLAN according to the rules outlined below This option is only available for EAPOL based modes i e e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X e Multi 802 1X For trouble shooting VLAN assignments use the Monitor gt VLANs gt VLAN Membership and VLAN Port pages These pages show which modules have temporarily overridden the current Port VLAN configuration Guest VLAN Operation When a Guest VLAN enabled port s link comes up the switch starts
94. 3 Rx Filtered The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process Short frames are frames that are smaller than 64 bytes Long frames are frames that are longer than the configured maximum frame length for this port Transmit Error Counters Tx Drops The number of frames dropped due to output buffer congestion e Tx Late Exc Coll The number of frames dropped due to excessive or late collisions e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh to refresh the Queuing Counters automatically e Upper right icon Refresh clear You can click them for refresh the Port Detail Statistics or clear them by manual 44 3 1 5 Qos Statistics The section describes that switch could display the QoS detailed Queuing counters for a specific switch port for the different queues for all switch ports The ports belong to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To Display the Queuing Counters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Port then QoS Statistics 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the Queuing Counters or clear all information when you click Clear Figure 3 1 5 The Queuing Counters Overview Queuing Counters Parameter description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Qn Qn is the Queue number QoS queues per port QO i
95. 3 The Detailed System Log Information Detailed System Log Information Do Message Level Warning Time 2011 01 01 00 00 08 Message Switch just made a warm boot Parameter description o ID The ID gt 1 of the system log entry eo Message The detailed message of the system log entry e Upper right icon Refresh clear You can click them for refresh the system log or clear them by manual others for next up page or entry 21 2 6 SNMP Any Network Management System NMS running the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP can manage the Managed devices equipped with SNMP agent provided that the Management Information Base MIB is installed correctly on the managed devices The SNMP is a protocol that is used to govern the transfer of information between SNMP manager and agent and traverses the Object Identity OID of the management Information Base MIB described in the form of SMI syntax SNMP agent is running on the switch to response the request issued by SNMP manager Basically it is passive except issuing the trap information The switch supports a switch to turn on or off the SNMP agent If you set the field SNMP Enable SNMP agent will be started up All supported MIB OIDs including RMON MIB can be accessed via SNMP manager If the field SNMP is set Disable SNMP agent will be de activated the related Community Name Trap Host IP Address Trap and all MIB counters
96. 3 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It can also represent a legally valid Pv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Prefix Provide the I Pv6 Prefix of this switch The allowed range is 1 to 128 e Router Provide the IPv6 gateway address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It can also represent a legally valid Pv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 18 2 5 Syslog The Syslog is a standard for logging program messages It allows separation of the software that generates messages from the system that stores them and the software that reports and analyzes them It can be used as well a generalized informational analysis and debugging messages It is supported by a wide variety of devices and receivers across multiple platforms 2 5 1 Configuration This section describes how to configure the system log and provide a wide variety of devices and receivers across multiple platforms Web Interface To configure Syslog configuration in the web interface 1 Click SYSTEM Syslog 2 Specify the
97. 9 entries from the IGMP SFM Information table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the IGMP SFM Information Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in 102 the IGMP SFM Information Table Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next IGMP SFM Information Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a Refresh button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address The gt gt will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the I lt lt button to start over IGMP SFM Information Table Columns e VLANID VLAN ID of the group e Group Group address of the group displayed Port Switch port number e Mode Indicates the filtering mode maintained per VLAN ID port number Group Address basis It can be either Include or Exclude e Source Address IP Address of the source Currently system limits the total number of IP source addresses for filtering to be 128 e Type Indicates the Type It can be either Allow or Deny e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device wi
98. Action Rate Limiter Port Redirect Te ACE Configuration Ingress Port Al v Policy Filter Any v Frame Type Action Permit v Rate Limiter Disabled v Port Redirect Disabled v Logging Disabled v Shutdown Disabled v Counter MAC Parameters VLAN Parameters DMAC Filter Any v VLAN ID Filter Any v Tag Priority nyy Parameter description Ingress Port Select the ingress port for which this ACE applies All The ACE applies to all port Port n The ACE applies to this port number where n is the number of the switch port e Policy Bitmask Indicates the policy number and bitmask of the ACE e Frame Type Indicates the frame type of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any frame type EType The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames Note that an Ethernet Type based ACE will not get matched by IP and ARP frames ARP The ACE will match ARP RARP frames I Pv4 The ACE will match all Pv4 frames Pv4 I CMP The ACE will match Pv4 frames with ICMP protocol I Pv4 UDP The ACE will match Pv4 frames with UDP protocol I Pv4 TCP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol Pv4 Other The ACE will match Pv4 frames which are not CMP UDP TCP IPv6 Only IPv6 frames can match this ACE Notice the IPv6 frames won t match the ACE with ethernet type 55 e Action Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE Permit
99. Any default value is Any 3 LLC SSAP Address Valid SSAP Source Service Access Point can vary from 0x00 to OxFF or Any the default value is Any DSAP Address Valid DSAP Destination Service Access Point can vary from 0x00 to OxFF or Any the default value is Any Control Address Valid Control Address can vary from 0x00 to OxFF or Any the default value is Any 4 SNAP PID Valid PID a k a ethernet type can have value within 0x00 0xF FFF or Any default value is Any 5 IPv4 Protocol IP protocol number 0 255 TCP or UDP or Any Source IP Specific Source IP address in value mask format or Any IP and Mask are in the format x y z w where x y z and w are decimal numbers between 0 and 255 When Mask is converted to a 32 bit binary string and read from left to right all bits following the first zero must also be zero DSCP Diffserv Code Point value DSCP It can be specific value range of value or Any DSCP values are in the range 0 63 including BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 IP Fragment IPv4 frame fragmented option yes nolany Sport Source TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP Dport Destination TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP 6 IPv6 Protocol IP protocol number 0 255 TCP or UDP or Any Source IP IPv6 source address a b c d or Any 32 LS bits DSCP Diffserv Code Point value DSCP
100. D HH MM From Day Sn Week Fist Month isn Time HH MM To Day l Week iy Month Ja Time HH MM Apply Time amp Date 2011 01 01 00 55 42 Parameter description o Clock Source To click what clock source for the SW24GF4TG You can select Use local Settings or Use NTP Server for SW24GF4TG time clock source e Local Time Show the current time of the system e Time Zone Offset Provide the timezone offset relative to UTC GMT The offset is given in minutes east of GMT The valid range is from 720 to 720 minutes e Daylight Saving Daylight saving is adopted in some countries If set it will adjust the time lag or in advance in unit of hours according to the starting date and the ending date For example if you set the day light saving to be 1 hour When the time passes over the starting time the system time will be increased one hour after one minute at the time since it passed over And when the time passes over the ending time the system time will be decreased one hour after one minute at 9 the time since it passed over The switch supports valid configurable day light saving time is 5 5 step one hour The zero for this parameter means it need not have to adjust current time equivalent to in act daylight saving You don t have to set the starting ending date as well If you set daylight saving to be non zero you have to set the starting ending date as well otherwise the dayli
101. Disabled v 13 Disabled v 14 Disabled v 15 Disabled v 16 Disabled v 17 Disabled v 18 Disabled v 1a Tiicahled ae v o a OOM O H amp l wlnN JID OOOO OOOO OO OOOO Oo ISR ISS ISSO ISSO 9 ES ES ES ES S KS KS KS KS PKS YRS PKS YRS KS KS KS KS KS 120 Parameter description LLDP Parameters Tx Interval The switch periodically transmits LLDP frames to its neighbours for having the network discovery information up to date The interval between each LLDP frame is determined by the Tx Interval value Valid values are restricted to 5 32768 seconds Tx Hold Each LLDP frame contains information about how long the information in the LLDP frame shall be considered valid The LLDP information valid period is set to Tx Hold multiplied by Tx Interval seconds Valid values are restricted to 2 10 times Tx Delay If some configuration is changed e g the IP address a new LLDP frame is transmitted but the time between the LLDP frames will always be at least the value of Tx Delay seconds Tx Delay cannot be larger than 1 4 of the Tx Interval value Valid values are restricted to 1 8192 seconds Tx Reinit When a port is disabled LLDP is disabled or the switch is rebooted an LLDP shutdown frame is transmitted to the neighboring units signaling
102. Ej E is lt lt fi ls Js fis ls fs fis ls A E a ie amp a E nilo iii lolita e al el 3 4 Js s i lt ISK la lo o o fl al Jima al Wa Sl 5 Is SSVI ISIC 186 Parameter description eo DSCP Maximum number of supported DSCP values is 64 and valid DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63 Ingress Ingress side DSCP can be first translated to new DSCP before using the DSCP for QoS class and DPL map There are two configuration parameters for DSCP Translation 1 Translate DSCP at Ingress side can be translated to any of 0 63 DSCP values 2 Classify Click to enable Classification at Ingress side e Egress There are following configurable parameters for Egress side 1 Remap DPO Select the DSCP value from select menu to which you want to remap DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63 2 Remap DP1 Select the DSCP value from select menu to which you want to remap DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63 There is following configurable parameter for Egress side e Remap Select the DSCP value from select menu to which you want to remap DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63 e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 187 3 14 10 DSCP Classification The section describes to teach user to configure and allows you to map DSCP value to a QoS Class and DPL value Others the settings rela
103. GMP Snooping Status The Section provides you to let switch to display the IGMP Snooping detail status Web Interface To display the IGMP Snooping status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration IGMP Snooping Status 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh Click Refresh to refresh the IGMP Snooping Status Click Clear to clear the IGMP Snooping Status Figure 3 5 4 The I GMP Snooping Status IGMP Snooping Status Auto refresh O Statistics VLAN Querier Host Querier Queries Queries V1 Reports V2 Reports V3 Reports V2 Leaves ID Version Version Status Transmitted Received Received Received Received Received Router Port Port Status 1 A As S 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Parameter description e VLANID The VLAN ID of the entry e Querier Version Working Querier Version currently e Host Version Working Host Version currently e Querier Status Shows the Querier status is ACTIVE or IDLE 99 Queries Transmitted The number of Transmitted Queries Queries Received The number of Received Queries V1 Reports Received The number of Received V1 Reports V2 Reports Received The number of Received V2 Reports V3 Reports Received The number of Received V3 Reports V2 Lea
104. Guest VLAN is disabled on all ports eo Guest VLAN ID This is the value that a port s Port VLAN ID is set to if a port is moved into the Guest VLAN It is only changeable if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled Valid values are in the range 1 4095 e Max Reauth Count The number of times the switch transmits an EAPOL Request Identity frame without response before considering entering the Guest VLAN is adjusted with this setting The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled Valid values are in the range 1 255 e Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen The switch remembers if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the life time of the port Once the switch considers whether to enter the Guest VLAN it will first check if this option is enabled or disabled If disabled unchecked default the switch will only enter the Guest VLAN if an EAPOL frame has not been received on the port for the life time of the port If enabled checked the switch will consider entering the Guest VLAN even if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the life time of the port The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled e Port Configuration The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in the stack and a number of columns which are Port The port number for which the configuration below applies e Admin State If NAS is globally enabled this selec
105. HA is equal to the DMAC address Any Any value is allowed don t care e 1P Ethernet Length Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP RARP hardware address length HLN and protocol address length PLN settings O ARP RARP frames where the HLN is not equal to Ethernet 0x06 or the PLN is not equal to IPv4 0x04 1 ARP RARP frames where the HLN is equal to Ethernet 0x06 and the PLN is equal to Pv4 0x04 Any Any value is allowed don t care o IP Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP RARP hardware address space HRD settings O ARP RARP frames where the HLD is not equal to Ethernet 1 1 ARP RARP frames where the HLD is equal to Ethernet 1 58 Any Any value is allowed don t care Ethernet Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP RARP protocol address space PRO settings O ARP RARP frames where the PRO is not equal to IP 0x800 1 ARP RARP frames where the PRO is equal to IP 0x800 Any Any value is allowed don t care IP Parameters The IP parameters can be configured when Frame Type IPv4 is selected IP Protocol Filter Specify the IP protocol filter for this ACE Any No IP protocol filter is specified don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific IP protocol filter with this ACE choose this value A field for entering an IP protocol filter appears I CMP Select ICMP to filter I
106. IP Address 192 168 1 254 Host MAC Address 00 40 16 9e 07 d0 Console Baudrate 115200 RAM Size 128MB Flash Size 16MB Bridge FDB Size 32768 MAC Addresses Transmit Queue 8 queues per port Maximum Frame Size 10056 Fan Speed Fan1 4687 rpm Fan2 4477 rpm Fan3 4901 rpm Powers AC Power On 12 5 DC Power Off 0 0W Temperature 1 35 0 95 F Temperature 2 32 C 89 F Temperature 3 36 C 96 F Temperature 4 35 0 95 F Parameter description Model name The model name of this device System description Displays the system description Location Displays the location where the system is currently running and can be configured in System System Information Configuration System Location Contact For easily managing and maintaining device you may write down the contact person and phone here for getting help soon You can configure this parameter through the device s user interface or SNMP Device name The name of the switch User defined System Date Show the system time of the switch Its format day of week month day hours minutes seconds year System up time The time accumulated since this switch is powered up Its format is day hour minute second BIOS version The version of the BIOS in this switch Firmware version The firmware version in this switch Hardware Mechanical version The version of Hardware and Mechanical The figure before the hyphen is the version of
107. MED Devices are comprised of two primary Device Types Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices LLDP MED Network Connectivity Device Definition LLDP MED Network Connectivity Devices as defined in TIA 1057 provide access to the IEEE 802 based LAN infrastructure for LLDP MED Endpoint Devices An LLDP MED Network Connectivity Device is a LAN access device based on any of the following technologies 1 LAN Switch Router 2 IEEE 802 1 Bridge 3 IEEE 802 3 Repeater included for historical reasons 4 IEEE 802 11 Wireless Access Point 5 Any device that supports the IEEE 802 1AB and MED extensions defined by TIA 1057 and can relay IEEE 802 frames via any method LLDP MED Endpoint Device Definition LLDP MED Endpoint Devices as defined in TIA 1057 are located at the IEEE 802 LAN network edge and participate in IP communication service using the LLDP MED framework Within the LLDP MED Endpoint Device category the LLDP MED scheme is broken into further Endpoint Device Classes as defined in the following Each LLDP MED Endpoint Device Class is defined to build upon the capabilities defined 132 for the previous Endpoint Device Class For example will any LLDP MED Endpoint Device claiming compliance as a Media Endpoint Class II also support all aspects of TIA 1057 applicable to Generic Endpoints Class and any LLDP MED Endpoint Device claiming compliance as a Communication Device Class III will also support all aspe
108. MPv6 Ping IP Address Ping Length SS Ping Cot Ping Interval Parameter description e IP Address The destination IP Address e Ping Length The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 2bytes to 1452 bytes e Ping Count The count of the ICMP packet Values range from 1 time to 60 times e Ping Interval The interval of the ICMP packet Values range from Osecond to 30 seconds 298 5 5 3 VeriPHY This section is used for running the VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics Press to run the diagnostics This will take approximately 5 seconds If all ports are selected this can take approximately 15 seconds When completed the page refreshes automatically and you can view the cable diagnostics results in the cable status table Note that VeriPHY is only accurate for cables of length 7 140 meters 10 and 100 Mbps ports will be linked down while running VeriPHY Therefore running VeriPHY on a 10 or 100 Mbps management port will cause the switch to stop responding until VeriPHY is complete Web Interface To configure a VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify Port which want to check 2 Click Start Figure 5 5 3 The VeriPHY VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics Port Al v Cable Status 21 Pair B LengthB Pair C LengthC PairD Length D TE E o AS o e a O po A ala ae Parameter description eo Port The port where you are requesting Ve
109. Managed 28 Port Gigabit Ethernet Switch with 24 SFP Ports and 4 10G SFP Ports User s Manual Copyright Purpose Audience CONVENTIONS WARRANTY Disclaimer FCC Warning About This Manual Copyright 2013 Manufacture Technology Corp All rights reserved The products and programs described in this User s Manual are licensed products of Manufacture Technology This User s Manual contains proprietary information protected by copyright and this Users Manual and all accompanying hardware software and documentation are copyrighted No parts of this User s manual may be copied photocopied reproduced translated or reduced to any electronic medium or machine readable from by any means by electronic or mechanical Including photocopying recording or information storage and retrieval systems for any purpose other than the purchaser s personal use and without the prior express written permission of Manufacture Technology This manual gives specific information on how to operate and use the management functions of the SW24GF4TG The Manual is intended for use by network administrators who are responsible for operating and maintaining network equipment consequently it assumes a basic working knowledge of general switch functions the Internet Protocol IP and Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP The following conventions are used throughout this manual to show information See the Customer Support Warrant
110. N ID The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in The field is blank if the Port VLAN ID is not overridden by NAS If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server RADIUS assigned is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about RADIUS assigned VLANs here If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN Guest is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about Guest VLANs here Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the NAS Switch Status by manual 263 4 5 3 Port Status The section describes to provide detailed NAS statistics for a specific switch port running EAPOL based IEEE 802 1X authentication Web Interface To configure a NAS Port Status Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify Port which want to check 2 Checked Auto refresh Figure 4 5 3 The NAS Statistics NAS Statistics Port 1 Pot1 Mi Port State Admin State Force Authorized Port State Globally Disabled Parameter description Port State Admin State The port s current administrative state Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of possible values Port State The current state of the port Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the individual states QoS Class The QoS class assigned by the RADIUS server The field is blank if no QoS class is assigned Port VLAN ID The VLAN ID
111. P standard LLDP frames require a new entry in the table when the Chassis ID or Remote Port ID is not already contained within the table Entries are removed from the table when a given port s link is down an LLDP shutdown frame is received or when the entry ages out TLVs Discarded Each LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information known as TLVs TLV is short for Type Length Value If a TLV is malformed it is counted and discarded e TLVs Unrecognized The number of well formed TLVs but with an unknown type value e Org Discarded The number of organizationally received TLVs e Age Outs Each LLDP frame contains information about how long time the LLDP information is valid age out time If no new LLDP frame is received within the age out time the LLDP information is removed and the Age Out counter is incremented e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh Clear You can click them for refresh the LLDP Port Statistics information by manual Or press clear to clean up the entries 136 3 9 Filtering Data Base Filtering Data Base Configuration gathers many functions including MAC Table Information Static MAC Learning which cannot be categorized to some function type MAC table Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame The switch builds up a table that maps MAC addresses to s
112. P supports identifying protocols by Ethernet type field values it also supports vendor private protocol identifier SNMP SNMP is an acronym for Simple Network Management Protocol It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP protocol for network management SNMP allow diverse network objects to participate in a network management architecture It enables network management systems to learn network problems by receiving traps or change notices from network devices implementing SNMP SNTP SNTP is an acronym for Simple Network Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems SNTP uses UDP datagrams as transport layer SPROUT Stack Protocol using ROUting Technology An advanced protocol for almost instantaneous discovery of topology changes within a stack as well as election of a master switch SPROUT also calculates parameters for setting up each switch to perform shortest path forwarding within the stack SSID Service Set Identifier is a name used to identify the particular 802 11 wireless LANs to which a user wants to attach A client device will receive broadcast messages from all access points within range advertising their SSIDs and can choose one to connect to based on pre configuration or by displaying a list of SSIDs in range and asking the user to select one wikipedia SSH SSH is an acronym for Secure SHell It is a network protocol that allows data to be exchanged
113. Pv4 ICMP protocol frames Extra fields for defining ICMP parameters will appear These fields are explained later in this help file UDP Select UDP to filter Pv4 UDP protocol frames Extra fields for defining UDP parameters will appear These fields are explained later in this help file TCP Select TCP to filter Pv4 TCP protocol frames Extra fields for defining TCP parameters will appear These fields are explained later in this help file P Protocol Value When Specific is selected for the IP protocol value you can enter a specific value The allowed range is O to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this IP protocol value IP TTL Specify the Time to Live settings for this ACE zero Pv4 frames with a Time to Live field greater than zero must not be able to match this entry non zero Pv4 frames with a Time to Live field greater than zero must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care IP Fragment Specify the fragment offset settings for this ACE This involves the settings for the More Fragments MF bit and the Fragment Offset FRAG OFFSET field for an IPv4 frame No Pv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is greater than zero must not be able to match this entry Yes Pv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is greater than zero must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care IP Option Specify the options flag s
114. Rx and Tx Variable Response A count of the number of Variable Response OAMPDUs received and transmitted on this interface Rx and Tx Org Specific PDU s A count of the number of Organization Specific OAMPDUs transmitted on this interface Rx and Tx Unsupported Codes A count of the number of OAMPDUs transmitted on this interface with an unsupported op code Rx and Tx Link fault PDU s Account of the number of Link fault PDU s received and transmitted on this interface Rx and Tx Dying Gasp A count of the number of Dying Gasp events received and transmitted on this interface Rx and Tx Critical Event PDU s A count of the number of Critical event PDU s received and transmitted on this interface Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh clear You can click them for refresh the refresh or clear information by manual 225 3 21 Ethernet OAM The chapter describes the Ethernet OAM configuration Before you configure the Ethernet OAM then you need to understand what MEP Maintenance Entity Point is first The MEP means the Points at the edge of the domain define the boundary for the domain A MEP sends and receives CFM frames through the relay function drops all CFM frames of its level or lower that come from the wire side Web Interface OT PANA To configure the Ethernet OAM in the web interface Click Configuration E
115. Upper right icon Refresh clear You can click them for refresh the refresh and clear information by manual Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 218 3 20 3 Port Status This chapter introduce you when you configure the EEE802 3ah OAM then the switch will display the Port Status in this page It provides Link OAM configuration operational status The displayed field shows the active configuration status for the selected port Web Interface To display the Port Status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration 802 3ah OAM then Port status 2 Scroll to select which port you want to monitor the Link OAM Status 3 Evoke auto refresh to update the detailed Link OAM Status data 4 Click the Refresh to update the Port Status Figure 3 20 3 The Link OAM Port status Detailed Link OAM Status for Port 1 Port vw Auto refresh O PDU Permission Receive only Discovery State Fault state Remote MAC Address Local Remote Mode Passive Mode Unidirectional Operation Support Disabled Unidirectional Operation Support Remote Loopback Support Disabled Remote Loopback Support Link Monitoring Support Enabled Link Monitoring Support MIB Retrieval Support Disabled MIB Retrieval Support MTU Size 1500 MTU Size we Multiplexer State Forwardin
116. VCXO rate adjustment The following values are possible 1 True Enable the external VCXO rate adjustment 2 False Disable the external VCXO rate adjustment e Clock Frequency This will allow setting the Clock Frequency The possible range of values is 1 25000000 1 25MHz PTP Clock Configuration e Delete Check this box and click on Save to delete the clock instance e Clock Instance Indicates the Instance of a particular Clock Instance 0 3 Click on the Clock Instance number to edit the Clock details Device Type Indicates the Type of the Clock Instance There are five Device Types 1 0Ord Bound clock s Device Type is Ordinary Boundary Clock 2 P2p Transp clock s Device Type is Peer to Peer Transperent Clock 3 E2e Transp clock s Device Type is End to End Transperent Clock 4 MastrOnly clock s Device Type is Master Only 5 SlaveOnly clock s Device Type is Slave Only e Port List Set check mark for each port configured for this Clock Instance e 2 Step Flag Static member defined by the system true if two step Sync events and Pdelay_Resp events are used e Clock Identity It shows unique clock identifier e One Way If true one way measurements are used This parameter applies only to a slave In oneway mode no delay measurements are performed i e this is applicable only if frequency synchronization is needed The master always responds to delay requests e Protocol Transport protocol use
117. adecimal digit A frame that hits this ACE matches this SMAC value Oo DMAC Filter Specify the destination MAC filter for this ACE Any No DMAC filter is specified DMAC filter status is don t care MC Frame must be multicast BC Frame must be broadcast UC Frame must be unicast Specific If you want to filter a specific destination MAC address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a DMAC value appears eo DMAC Value When Specific is selected for the DMAC filter you can enter a specific destination MAC address The legal format is XX XX XX XX XX XX Or 56 XX XX XX XX XX XX Or XXXXXXXXXXXX x iS a hexadecimal digit A frame that hits this ACE matches this DMAC value VLAN Parameters e VLAN ID Filter Specify the VLAN ID filter for this ACE Any No VLAN ID filter is specified VLAN ID filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific VLAN ID with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a VLAN ID number appears e VLAN ID When Specific is selected for the VLAN ID filter you can enter a specific VLAN ID number The allowed range is 1 to 4094 A frame that hits this ACE matches this VLAN ID value e Tag Priority Specify the tag priority for this ACE A frame that hits this ACE matches this tag priority The allowed number range is 0 to 7 The value Any means that no tag priority is specified tag priority is don t care eo Buttons Apply Clic
118. aeeneas 151 3 10 61 Configu ratloM cita 151 3 10 6 2 StAtUs cusses tie AE EE E EEEE AA REEERE NE REPERA AEN RRA KENEEN 153 3 10 7 Protocol b s ed VLAN AA en e a eia a O a 154 3 107 Protocol to GROUP sinen aeae e E A id 154 3 10 72 Group tO VLAN dida aaa 157 3 VLAN TRANSLATION A O O NT 159 3 11 1 Port to Group Mapping i ic sssssscsecsesssessssnsoecesicasesassaasiociontsossinescnseaseabeessseacsovboostesvssnsseredessesbasasouees 159 3 11 2 VID Translation Mapping c s sccecscecsessisnsoenessctsssasscssieeionsvassisessneesceabesssconssoessestcstisnsseredessesbavesenets 161 EPA GAR Picos RA 162 IAZAEConfIgUra lO id diia iia Sad 162 E PASAN A EN 165 JASGVRPi ii a ep oe ate Raed eel nb A a elena ite asl 166 3 13 Configurando Tdi vi id 166 313 2 SUAUSTICS id E dica diaz 168 3 14 QOS ia A A AA Ora it 169 ITAI Por Classificat n Zi ads 169 IL 42 POPEPOUCING a a ia fac 171 3 14 3 Queue LAA RRA NN 173 INN TNA AR E lea ducstsaaebent iSS 174 3 143 POPESNAPING airis 177 3 14 6 PortTag Remarkine iia ias 180 S214 7 Bort DSC P A A AAA id 182 3 14 38 DSCPBaSed OOS ZA ln eee a ieee Ade 184 TUE DS CP TNs LAU AA A A AA a ck Cb han sd eves i 186 3 141 O DS CP Classification Sonia ii ia a a 188 3 14 11 QoS Control List CONfiQUr ations coin ia dad e dieta 189 S214 12 OC SIGs A A A AA A A een Bee ia 193 JA43 Storm Controla A AAA A A A AA a e S 195 S214 14 WRED A A OE dla 197 Ded Ded CONPIBUT ANON A ia 199 ENANA O RN 202 3 16 LOOP PROTECTION
119. ah OAM then Port config 2 Evoke which Port wants to enable OAM function 3 Scroll to select OAM mode with Passive or Active 4 Evoke which port wants to support Loopback Link monitor MIB Retrieval or Loopback operation gn Click the Apply to save the setting 6 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 20 1 The Link OAM Port Configuration 214 Link OAM Port Configuration Port OAM Enabled OAM Mode Loopback Support Link Monitor Support MIB Retrieval Support Loopback Operation O o E C O O O 1 O Passive Y O O O 2 O Passive v O O O 3 O Passive Y O O O 4 O Passive Y O O O 5 O Passive Y d O O 6 g Passive Y O O O fz O Passive Y O O O 8 O Passive Y O O O 9 O Passive Y O O O 10 O Passive Y a m O u O Passive Y O O O 12 O Passive Y O O O 13 O Passive v O O O 14 O Passive Y O O O 15 O Passive d O O 16 O Passive Y O O O 17 O Passive Y O O O 18 O Passive O O O 19 O Passive V O O O an rt Passive e 1 Tvl FT FT Parameter description e Port Members The switch port number and index for port configuration IEEE 802 3ah OAM OAM Enabled It supports you to evoke to set OAM enable or disable on the Port Controls whether Link OAM is enabled on this switch por
120. al the request is transmitted again This algorithm causes the RADIUS server to be queried up to 3 times before it is considered to be dead eo Dead Time The Dead Time which can be set to a number between 0 and 3600 seconds is the period during which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond to a previous request This will stop the switch from continually trying to contact a server that it has already determined as dead 269 Setting the Dead Time to a value greater than 0 zero will enable this feature but only if more than one server has been configured RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration The table has one row for each RADIUS Authentication Server and a number of columns which are o The RADIUS Authentication Server number for which the configuration below applies e Enabled Enable the RADIUS Authentication Server by checking this box e IP Address Hostname The IP address or hostname of the RADIUS Authentication Server IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation e Port The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Authentication Server If the port is set to 0 zero the default port 1812 is used on the RADIUS Authentication Server o Secret The secret up to 29 characters long shared between the RADIUS Authentication Server and the switch stack RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration The table has one row for each RADIUS Accounting Server and a number of co
121. allback console telnet ssh web Parameter description e Client The management client for which the configuration below applies e Authentication Method Authentication Method can be set to one of the following values e none authentication is disabled and login is not possible e local use the local user database on the switch stack for authentication e radius use aremote RADIUS server for authentication e tacacs use a remote TACACS server for authentication Oo Fallback Enable fallback to local authentication by checking this box If none of the configured authentication servers are alive the local user database is used for authentication This is only possible if the Authentication Method is set to a value other than none or local e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 286 Maintenance This chapter describes all of the switch Maintenance configuration tasks to enhance the performance of local network including Restart Device Firmware upgrade Save Restore Import Export and Diagnostics 5 1 Restart Device This section describes how to restart switch for any maintenance needs Any configuration files or scripts that you saved in the switch should still be available afterwards Web Interface To configure a Restart Device Configuration in the web interface 1 Chick Restart Device 2
122. alse Clock Frequency 1 PTP Clock Configuration Port List Clock Instance Device Type No Clock Instances Present Parameter description e One_pps_mode Shows the current One_pps_mode configured 1 Output Enable the 1 pps clock output 2 Input Enable the 1 pps clock input 3 Disable Disable the 1 pps clock in out put External Enable Shows the current External clock output configuration 1 True Enable the external clock output 2 False Disable the external clock output e VCXO_ Enable Shows the current VCXO rate adjustment configuration 1 True Enable the external VCXO rate adjustment 2 False Disable the external VCXO rate adjustment Clock Frequency Shows the current clock frequency used by the External Clock The possible range of values are 1 25000000 1 25MHz e Clock Instance Indicates the Instance of a particular Clock Instance 0 3 Click on the Clock Instance number to monitor the Clock details 235 Device Type Indicates the Type of the Clock Instance There are five Device Types 1 0rd Bound Clock s Device Type is Ordinary Boundary Clock 2 P2p Transp Clock s Device Type is Peer to Peer Transperent Clock 3 E2e Transp Clock s Device Type is End to End Transperent Clock 4 MastrOnly Clock s Device Type is Master Only 5 SlaveOnly Clock s Device Type is Slave Only e Port List Shows the ports configured for that Clock Instance e Auto r
123. ame It is also known as User Priority PD is an acronym for Powered Device In a PoE gt system the power is delivered from a PSE power sourcing equipment to a remote device The remote device is called a PD PHY is an abbreviation for Physical Interface Transceiver and is the device that implement the Ethernet physical layer IEEE 802 3 ping is a program that sends a series of packets over a network or the Internet to a specific computer in order to generate a response from that computer The other computer responds with an acknowledgment that it received the packets Ping was created to verify whether a specific computer on a network or the Internet exists and is connected ping uses Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP packets The PING Request is the packet from the origin computer and the PING Reply is the packet response from the target PoE is an acronym for Power Over Ethernet Power Over Ethernet is used to transmit electrical power to remote devices over standard Ethernet cable It could for example be used for powering IP telephones wireless LAN access points and other equipment where it would be difficult or expensive to connect the equipment to main power supply Policer POP3 A policer can limit the bandwidth of received frames It is located in front of the ingress queue POP3 is an acronym for Post Office Protocol version 3 It is a protocol for email clients to retrieve email messages from a mail server
124. ame any kind of frame sent by a client is snooped by the switch which in turn uses the client s MAC address as both username and password in the subsequent EAP exchange with the RADIUS server The 6 byte MAC address is converted to a string on the following form xx XX XX XX XX XxX that is a dash is used as separator between the lower cased hexadecimal digits The switch only supports the MD5 Challenge authentication method so the RADIUS server must be configured accordingly When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a success or failure indication which in turn causes the switch to open up or block traffic for that particular client using the Port Security module Only then will frames from the client be forwarded on the switch There are no EAPOL frames involved in this authentication and therefore MAC based Authentication has nothing to do with the 802 1X standard The advantage of MAC based authentication over port based 802 1X is that several clients can be connected to the same port e g through a 3rd party switch or a hub and still require individual authentication and that the clients don t need special supplicant software to authenticate The advantage of MAC based authentication over 802 1X based authentication is that the clients don t need special supplicant software to authenticate The disadvantage is that MAC addresses can be spoofed by malicious users equipment whose MAC address is a valid RADIUS user c
125. ame and password Only one administrator is allowed to exist and unable to be deleted In addition up to 4 guest accounts can be created 2 3 1 Users This page provides an overview of the current users Currently the only way to login as another user on the web server is to close and reopen the browser Web Interface To configure Account in the web interface 1 Click SYSTEM Account Users 2 Click Add new user 3 Specify the User Name parameter 4 Click Apply Figure 2 3 1 The Users Account configuration Users Configuration Privilege Level 15 User Name admin Add User User Settings User Name Password Password again Privilege Level 1 v Ap Parameter description e User Name The name identifying the user This is also a link to Add Edit User e Password To type the password The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126 12 e Password again To type the password again You must type the same password again in the field e Privilege Level The privilege level of the user The allowed range is 1 to 15 If the privilege level value is 15 it can access all groups i e that is granted the fully control of the device But others value need to refer to each group privilege level User s privilege should be same or greater than the group privilege level to hav
126. an be used by anyone Also only the MD5 Challenge method is supported The maximum number of clients that can be attached to a port can be limited using the Port Security Limit Control functionality RADI US Assigned QoS Enabled When RADIUS Assigned QoS is both globally enabled and enabled checked on a given port the switch reacts to QoS Class information carried in the RADIUS Access Accept packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated If present and valid traffic received on the supplicant s port will be classified to the given QoS Class If re authentication fails or the RADIUS Access Accept packet no longer carries a QoS Class or it s invalid or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the port the port s QoS Class is immediately reverted to the original QoS Class which may be changed by the administrator in the meanwhile without affecting the RADIUS assigned This option is only available for single client modes i e e Port based 802 1X Single 802 1X RADIUS attributes used in identifying a QoS Class Refer to the written documentation for a description of the RADIUS attributes needed in order to successfully identify a QoS Class The User Priority Table attribute defined in RFC4675 forms the basis for identifying the QoS Class in an Access Accept packet Only the first occurrence of the attribute in the packet will be considered and to be valid it must follow this rule
127. apan Block Neighbourhood Neighbourhood block Street Street Example Poppelvej Leading street direction Leading street direction Example N Trailing street suffix Trailing street suffix Example SW Street suffix Street suffix Example Ave Platz House no House number Example 21 House no suffix House number suffix Example A 1 2 Landmark Landmark or vanity address Example Columbia University Additional location info Additional location info Example South Wing Name Name residence and office occupant Example Flemming Jahn Zip code Postal zip code Example 2791 Building Building structure Example Low Library Apartment Unit Apartment suite Example Apt 42 Floor Floor Example 4 Room no Room number Example 450F Place type Place type Example Office Postal community name Postal community name Example Leonia P O Box Post office box P O BOX Example 12345 Additional code Additional code Example 1320300003 Emergency Call Service Emergency Call Service e g E911 and others such as defined by TIA or NENA 128 e Emergency Call Service Emergency Call Service ELIN identifier data format is defined to carry the ELIN identifier as used during emergency call setup to a traditional CAMA or ISDN trunk based PSAP This format consists of a numerical digit string corresponding to the ELIN to be used for
128. ard but features many of the same characteristics as does port based 802 1X Multi 802 1X is like Single 802 1X not an IEEE standard but a variant that features many of the same characteristics In Multi 802 1X one or more supplicants can get authenticated on the same port at the same time Each supplicant is 258 authenticated individually and secured in the MAC table using the Port Security module In Multi 802 1X it is not possible to use the multicast BPDU MAC address as destination MAC address for EAPOL frames sent from the switch towards the supplicant since that would cause all supplicants attached to the port to reply to requests sent from the switch Instead the switch uses the supplicant s MAC address which is obtained from the first EAPOL Start or EAPOL Response Identity frame sent by the supplicant An exception to this is when no supplicants are attached In this case the switch sends EAPOL Request Identity frames using the BPDU multicast MAC address as destination to wake up any supplicants that might be on the port The maximum number of supplicants that can be attached to a port can be limited using the Port Security Limit Control functionality MAC based Auth Unlike port based 802 1X MAC based authentication is not a standard but merely a best practices method adopted by the industry In MAC based authentication users are called clients and the switch acts as the supplicant on behalf of clients The initial fr
129. ate machine maintain the contents of Dynamic VLAN Registration Entries for each VLAN and propagate these information to other GVRP aware devices to setup and update their knowledge database the set of VLANs associated with currently active members and through which ports these members can be reached 3 13 1 Configuration This page allows you to configure the basic GVRP Configuration settings for all switch ports The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To configure GVRP Port Configuration in the web interface 1 Click GVRP configure 2 Specify GVRP Configuration Parameters 3 Click Apply Figure 3 13 1 The GVRP Global Configuration Global Configuration GVRP Mode Disable v Port Configuration Port GVRP Mode GVRP rrole 1 Disable v Disable v 2 Disable v Disable v a Disable v Disable v 4 Disable v Disable v 5 Disable v Disable v 6 Disable v Disable v 7 Disable v Disable v 8 Disable v Disable v al Disable v Disable v 10 Disable v Disable v 11 Disable v Disable v 12 Disable v Disable v 13 Disable v Disable v 14 Disable v Disable v 15 Disable v Disable v 16 Disable v Disable v as Tiisahle e Tiisahle x 166 Parameter description e GVRP Mode GVRP Mode is a global setting to enable the GVRP globally select Enable from menu and to disable GVRP globally select Disable In stacking this configuration command sends
130. atus and method to isolate ports on layer 2 switches on the same VLAN to restrict traffic flow The apparatus comprises a switch having said plurality of ports each port configured as a protected port or a non protected port An address table memory stores an address table having a destination address and port number pair A forwarding map generator generates a forwarding map which is responsive to a destination address of a data packet The method for isolating ports on a layer 2 switch comprises configuring each of the ports on the layer 2 switch as a protected port or a non protected port A destination address on an data packet is matched with a physical address on said layer 2 switch and a forwarding map is generated for the data packet based upon the destination address on the data packet The data packet is then sent to the plurality of ports pursuant to the forwarding map generated based upon whether the ingress port was configured as a protected or non protected port This page is used for enabling or disabling port isolation on ports in a Private VLAN A port member of a VLAN can be isolated to other isolated ports on the same VLAN and Private VLAN Web Interface To configure Port Isolation configuration in the web interface 1 Click VLAN Port Isolation 2 Evoke which port want to enable Port Isolation 3 Click Apply Figure 3 10 5 2 The Port Isolation Configuration Port Isolation Configuration Port Number Param
131. ble device Station only oN Da KR WD 123 9 Reserved When a capability is enabled the capability is followed by If the capability is disabled the capability is followed by System Description System Description is the port description advertised by the neighbour unit Management Address Management Address is the neighbour unit s address that is used for higher layer entities to assist discovery by the network management This could for instance hold the neighbour s IP address Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the LLDP Neighbours information by manual 124 3 8 3 LLDP MED Configuration Media Endpoint Discovery is an enhancement of LLDP known as LLDP MED that provides the following facilities Auto discovery of LAN policies such as VLAN Layer 2 Priority and Differentiated services Diffserv settings enabling plug and play networking Device location discovery to allow creation of location databases and in the case of Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Enhanced 911 services Extended and automated power management of Power over Ethernet PoE end points Inventory management allowing network administrators to track their network devices and determine their characteristics manufacturer software and hardware versions serial or asset number This page allows y
132. but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled RADIUS Accounting Servers o The RADIUS server number Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server o IP Address 272 The IP address and UDP port number in lt IP Address gt lt UDP Port gt notation of this server o State The current state of the server This field takes one of the following values Disabled The server is disabled Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept accounting attempts Dead X seconds left Accounting attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the RADIUS Status by manual 273 4 6 3 Radius Details This section sh
133. causes the port to disable itself upon receiving valid BPDU s Contrary to the similar bridge setting the port Edge status does not affect this setting A port entering error disabled state due to this setting is subject to the bridge Port Error Recovery setting as well o Point to Point Controls whether the port connects to a point to point LAN rather than to a shared medium This can be automatically determined or forced either true or false Transition to the forwarding state is faster for point to point LANs than for shared media 83 e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 84 3 4 5 MSTI Ports The section describes it allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI port configurations and possibly change them as well An MSTI port is a virtual port which is instantiated separately for each active CIST physical port for each MSTI instance configured on and applicable to the port The MSTI instance must be selected before displaying actual MSTI port configuration options It contains MSTI port settings for physical and aggregated ports The aggregation settings are stack global Web Interface To configure the Spanning Tree MSTI Port Configuration parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Spanning Tree MSTI Ports Scroll to select the MST1 or other MSTI Port Click Get to set the detail parameters of the MSTI Ports Scro
134. ce Entity Intermediate Point Direction You can scroll to select the direction with Ingress or Egress Ingress This is a Ingress down MEP monitoring ingress traffic on Residence Port Egress This is a Egress up MEP monitoring egress traffic on Residence Port Residence Port The port where MEP is monitoring see Direction You need to assign a port to monitor the MEP status Level The MEG level of this MEP Shared MEGs are the case where there is no encapsulation of the ETH frames differently between subscriber s frames and SP s frames Hence they share the pool of MEG levels where the customer can use 5 through 7 and the SP and operate use the rest If there is a different encapsulation then each can use all 8 levels hence they are independent Flow instance The MEP is related to this flow See Domain MEP monitors the flow by sending periodic CCMs for that flow Tagged VID Port MEP An outer C S tag depending on VLAN Port Type is added with this VID Entering 0 means no TAG added This MAC The field will display the MEP device MAC address Switch will detect the MEP device MAC address The MAC of this MEP can be used by other MEP when unicast is selected Info only Alarm The field will display the MEP alarm data There is an active alarm on the MEP Buttons Add new MEP Click to add a new MEP entry Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any c
135. ced security by isolation from data applications 2 Voice Signalling for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signalling than for the voice media 3 Guest Voice to support a separate limited feature set voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting 133 interactive voice services 4 Guest Voice Signalling for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signalling than for the guest voice media 5 Softphone Voice for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices such as PCs or laptops 6 Video Conferencing for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar appliances supporting real time interactive video audio services 7 Streaming Video for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type 8 Video Signalling for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signalling than for the video media Policy Policy indicates that an Endpoint Device wants to explicitly advertise that the policy is required by the device Can be either Defined or Unknown Unknown The network policy for the spec
136. ch have different floor to floor dimensions An altitude 0 0 is meaningful even outside a building and represents ground level at the given latitude and longitude Inside a building 0 0 represents the floor level associated with ground level at the main entrance Map Datum The Map Datum is used for the coordinates given in these options WGS84 Geographical 3D World Geodesic System 1984 CRS Code 4327 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich NAD83 NAVD88 North American Datum 1983 CRS Code 4269 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich The associated vertical datum is the North American Vertical Datum of 1988 NAVD88 This datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on land not near tidal water which would use Datum NAD83 MLLW NAD83 MLLW North American Datum 1983 CRS Code 4269 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich The associated vertical datum is Mean Lower Low Water MLLW This datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on water sea ocean Civic Address Location IETF Geopriv Civic Address based Location Configuration Information Civic Address LCI Country code The two letter ISO 3166 country code in capital ASCII letters Example DK DE or US State National subdivisions state canton region province prefecture County County parish gun Japan district City City township shi Japan Example Copenhagen 127 City district City division borough city district ward chou J
137. ck Refresh for manual update web screen 3 Click Auto refresh for auto update web screen 4 Click Clear to clear all counters Figure 3 8 5 The LLDP Port Statistics information Auto refresh O LLDP Statistics Parameter description Global Counters Neighbour entries were last changed at It also shows the time when the last entry was last deleted or added It also shows the time elapsed since the last change was detected e Total Neighbours Entries Added Shows the number of new entries added since switch reboot e Total Neighbours Entries Deleted Shows the number of new entries deleted since switch reboot e Total Neighbours Entries Dropped Shows the number of LLDP frames dropped due to the entry table being full 135 e Total Neighbours Entries Aged Out Shows the number of entries deleted due to Time To Live expiring Local Counters The displayed table contains a row for each port The columns hold the following information Local Port The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted e Tx Frames The number of LLDP frames transmitted on the port Rx Frames The number of LLDP frames received on the port e Rx Errors The number of received LLDP frames containing some kind of error e Frames Discarded If an LLDP frame is received on a port and the switch s internal table has run full the LLDP frame is counted and discarded This situation is known as Too Many Neighbours in the LLD
138. cked Auto refresh Figure 4 7 3 The Port Security Port Status Port Security Port Status Port 1 Potl vw Total Secured Mac entries 0 Index MAC Address VLAN ID State Time of Addition Age Hold No MAC addresses attached Parameter description e MAC Address amp VLAN ID The MAC address and VLAN ID that is seen on this port If no MAC addresses are learned a single row stating No MAC addresses attached is displayed Oo State Indicates whether the corresponding MAC address is blocked or forwarding In the blocked state it will not be allowed to transmit or receive traffic e Time of Addition Shows the date and time when this MAC address was first seen on the port e Age Hold If at least one user module has decided to block this MAC address it will stay in the blocked state until the hold time measured in seconds expires If all user modules have decided to allow this MAC address to forward and aging is enabled the Port Security module will periodically check that this MAC address still forwards traffic If the age period measured in seconds expires and no frames have been seen the MAC address will be removed from the MAC table Otherwise a new age period will begin If aging is disabled or a user module has decided to hold the MAC address indefinitely a dash will be shown e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically e U
139. classified with the value displayed under DSCP column e Modification Buttons You can modify each QCE QoS Control Entry in the table using the following buttons Inserts a new QCE before the current row 8 Edits the QCE Moves the QCE up the list Q Moves the QCE down the list 69 Deletes the QCE O The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the QCE listings e Port Members Check the checkbox button in case you what to make any port member of the QCL entry By default all ports will be checked e Key Parameters 190 Key configuration are described as below Tag Value of Tag field can be Any Untag or Tag VID Valid value of VLAN ID can be any value in the range 1 4095 or Any user can enter either a specific value or a range of VIDs PCP Priority Code Point Valid value PCP are specific 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or range 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 3 4 7 or Any DEI Drop Eligible Indicator Valid value of DEI can be any of values between 0 1 or Any SMAC Source MAC address 24 MS bits OUI or Any DMAC Type Destination MAC type possible values are unicast UC multicast MC broadcast BC or Any Frame Type Frame Type can have any of the following values Any Ethernet LLC SNAP IPv4 IPv6 DAIRAONA M NOTE All frame types are explained below 1 Any Allow all types of frames 2 Ethernet Ethernet Type Valid ethernet type can have value within 0x600 0xFFFF or
140. consists of 1 byte DSAP Destination Service Access Point 1 byte SSAP Source Service Access Point 1 or 2 bytes Control field followed by LLC information LLDP is an IEEE 802 1ab standard protocol The Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP specified in this standard allows stations attached to an IEEE 802 LAN to advertise to other stations attached to the same IEEE 802 LAN the major capabilities provided by the system incorporating that station the management address or addresses of the entity or entities that provide management of those capabilities and the identification of the stations point of attachment to the IEEE 802 LAN required by those management entity or entities The information distributed via this protocol is stored by its recipients in a standard Management Information Base MIB making it possible for the information to be accessed by a Network Management System NMS using a management protocol such as the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP LLDP MED LOC M LLDP MED is an extendsion of IEEE 802 1ab and is defined by the telecommunication industry association TIA 1057 LOC is an acronym for Loss Of Connectivity and is detected by a MEP and is indicating lost connectivity in the network Can be used as a switch criteria by EPS MAC Table MEP Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame The switch builds up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which po
141. cription Navigating the IGMP Group Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the IGMP Group Table The will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table IGMP Group Table Columns e VLANID VLAN ID of the group e Groups Group address of the group displayed e Port Members Ports under this group e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the log automatically Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt You can click them for refresh the IGMP Group Status by manual others for next up page or entry 101 3 5 6 IPv4 SSM information Source Specific Multicast SSM is a datagram delivery model that best supports one to many applications also known as broadcast applications SSM is a core network technology of IP multicast targeted for audio and video broadcast application environments For the SSM delivery mode an IP multicast receiver host must use IGMP Version 3 IGMPv3 to subscribe to channel S G By subscribing to this channel the receiver host is indicating that it wants to receive IP multicast traffic sent by source host S to group G The network will deliver IP multicast packets from source host S to group G to all hosts in the network that have subscribed to the channel S G SSM does not re
142. ctets supported by the DTE This value is compared to the remotes Maximum PDU Size and the smaller of the two is used Multiplexer State When in forwarding state the Device is forwarding non OAMPDUs to the lower sub layer In case of discarding the device discards all the non OAMPDU s Parser State When in forwarding state Device is forwarding non OAMPDUs to higher sublayer When in loopback Device is looping back non OAMPDUs to the lower sublayer When in discarding state Device is discarding non OAMPDUs Organizational Unique dentification 24 bit Organizationally Unique Identifier of the vendor PDU Revision It indicates the current revision of the Information TLV The value of this field shall start at zero and be incremented each time something in the Information TLV changes Upon reception of an Information TLV from a peer an OAM client may use this field to decide if it needs to be processed an Information TLV that is identical to the previous Information TLV doesn t need to be parsed as nothing in it has changed Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the refresh information by manual 220 3 20 4 Link Events This chapter introduces the user to inspect the current Link OAM Link Event configurations and change them as well The Link OAM Link Event status relate to the currently s
143. cts of TIA 1057 applicable to both Media Endpoints Class II and Generic Endpoints Class l m LLDP MED Generic Endpoint Class I The LLDP MED Generic Endpoint Class definition is applicable to all endpoint products that require the base LLDP discovery services defined in TIA 1057 however do not support IP media or act as an end user communication appliance Such devices may include but are not limited to IP Communication Controllers other communication related servers or any device requiring basic services as defined in TIA 1057 Discovery services defined in this class include LAN configuration device location network policy power management and inventory management m LLDP MED Media Endpoint Class Il The LLDP MED Media Endpoint Class II definition is applicable to all endpoint products that have IP media capabilities however may or may not be associated with a particular end user Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the previous Generic Endpoint Class Class and are extended to include aspects related to media streaming Example product categories expected to adhere to this class include but are not limited to Voice Media Gateways Conference Bridges Media Servers and similar Discovery services defined in this class include media type specific network layer policy discovery LLDP MED Communication Endpoint Class III The LLDP MED Communication Endpoint Class III definitio
144. d in the Mode of Network Access Server Configuration Checked Reauthentication Enabled Set Reauthentication Period Default is 3600 seconds Set EAPOL Timeout Default is 30 seconds Set Aging Period Default is 300 seconds Set Hold Time Default is 10 seconds Checked RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled Checked RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled Checked Guest VLAN Enabled Specify Guest VLAN ID OS AO O A m op e O Specify Max Reauth Count Checked Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen 13 Click Apply m N Figure 4 5 1 The Network Access Server Configuration 254 Network Access Server Configuration System Configuration Port Configuration lt g j Ferre Anthewived Y Reanthenticate Reinitialine Jal EE y el MEE Tl E l i lt d E ll a E E thorized Y E E E a E a E Parameter description e Mode Indicates if NAS is globally enabled or disabled on the switch stack If globally disabled all ports are allowed forwarding of frames Oo Reauthentication Enabled If checked successfully authenticated supplicants clients are reauthenticated after the interval specified by the Reauthentication Period Reauthentication for 802 1X enabled ports can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a switch port or if a supplicant is no longer attached For MAC based ports reauthentication is only useful if the RADIUS server configuration 255 has changed It d
145. d is shown as isid aggr id and for GLAGs as aggr id e Partner System ID The system ID MAC address of the aggregation partner e Partner Key The Key that the partner has assigned to this aggregation ID e Last changed The time since this aggregation changed e Local Ports Shows which ports are a part of this aggregation for this switch stack The format is Switch ID Port e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh to refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the LACP System status information by manual 70 3 3 2 3 Port Status This section describes that when you complete to set LACP function on the switch then it provides a Port Status overview for all LACP instances Web Interface To display the LACP Port status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration LACP Port Status 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the LACP Port Status Figure 3 3 2 3 The LACP Status LACP Status Parameter description eo Port 71 The switch port number LACP Yes means that LACP is enabled and the port link is up No means that LACP is not enabled or that the port link is down Backup means that the port could not join the aggregation group but will join if other port leaves Meanwhile it s LACP status is disabled Key The key assigned to this port Only p
146. d values Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the NAS Configuration by manual 261 4 5 2 Switch Status The section describes to show the each port NAS status information of the switch The status includes Admin State Port State Last Source Last ID QoS Class and Port VLAN ID Web Interface To configure a NAS Switch Status Configuration in the web interface 1 Checked Auto refresh Figure 4 5 2 The Network Access Server Switch Status Network Access Server Switch Status Auto refresh C Parameter description eo Port The switch port number Click to navigate to detailed NAS statistics for this port e Admin State The port s current administrative state Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of possible values Port State The current state of the port Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the individual states 0 Last Source The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame for EAPOL based authentication and the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC based authentication Last ID 262 The user name supplicant identity carried in the most recently received Response Identity EAPOL frame for EAPOL based authentication and the source MAC address from the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC based authentication QoS Class QoS Class assigned to the port by the RADIUS server if enabled Port VLA
147. d Current DHCP Client O Inband IP Address 1192 168 1 1 192 168 1 1 Inband IP Mask 255 255 255 0 255 25525510 Inband IP Gateway 1192 168 1 254 192 168 1 254 Inband VLAN ID 1 Inband Default Gateway a Outband IP Address 1192 168 0 1 192 168 0 1 Outband IP Mask 1255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 Outband IP Gateway 192 168 0254 192 168 0 254 DNS Server 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DNS Proxy Apply IP DNS Proxy Configuration 1 Parameter description DHCP Client Enable the DHCP client by checking this box If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is zero DHCP will retry If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is non zero DHCP will stop and the configured IP settings will be used The DHCP client will announce the configured System Name as hostname to provide DNS lookup IP Address Provide the IP address of this switch in dotted decimal notation IP Mask Provide the IP mask of this switch dotted decimal notation IP Router Provide the IP address of the router in dotted decimal notation SNTP Server Provide the IP address of the SNTP Server in dotted decimal notation DNS Server Provide the IP address of the DNS Server in dotted decimal notation VLAN ID Provide the managed VLAN ID The allowed range is 1 to 4095 DNS Proxy When DNS proxy is enabled DUT will relay DNS requests to the current configured DNS server on DUT and reply as a DNS resolver
148. d by the PTP protocol engine You can scroll to select the protocol with below items 233 ethernet PTP over Ethernet multicast ip4multi PTP over IPv4 multicast ip4uni PTP over IPv4 unicast O Note IPv4 unicast protocol only works in Master only and Slave only clocks See parameter Device Type In a unicast Slave only clock you also need configure which master clocks to request Announce and Sync messages from See Unicast Slave Configuration VLAN Tag Enable Enables the VLAN tagging for the PTP frames O NoTE Packets are only tagged if the port is configured for vlan tagging i e Port Type Unaware and PortVLAN mode None VID VLAN Identifier used for tagging the PTP frames PCP Priority Code Point value used for PTP frames Buttons Add new PTP Clock Click to add a new clock instance Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 234 3 22 2 Status This chapter allows the user to monitor the PTP configuration status and inspect the current PTP clock settings Web Interface To monitor the PTP status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration PTP then status 2 Evoke Auto refresh to enable the switch to update the PTP status automatically 3 Click Refresh to update the Status information manually Figure 3 24 2 The PTP status PTP External Clock Mode One_PPS_Mode Disable External Enable False VCXO Enable F
149. d shows this two octet field indicates the duration of the period in terms of 100 ms intervals 1 The default value is one second 2 The lower bound is one second 3 The The field shows this four octet field indicates the number of detected errored frames in the period is required to be equal to or greater than in order for the event to be generated 1 The default value is one frame error 2 The lower bound is zero frame errors 3 The upper bound is unspecified Frame Errors The field shows this four octet field indicates the number of detected errored frames in the period Total Frame Errors The field shows this eight octet field indicates the sum of errored frames that have been detected since the OAM sub layer was reset Total Frame Error Events The field shows this four octet field indicates the number of Errored Frame Event TLVs that have been generated since the OAM sub layer was reset Frame Period Error Event Timestamp The field shows this two octet field indicates the time reference when the event was generated in terms of 100 ms intervals Frame Period Error Event Window The field shows this four octet field indicates the duration of period in terms of frames Frame Period Error Event Threshold The field shows this four octet field indicates the number of errored frames in the period is required to be equal to or greater than in order for the event to be generated Frame Period Errors The field sh
150. de locally and revert to previously saved values 117 3 7 3 Groups Information The section describes user could display the MVR Groups detail information on the switch Entries in the MVR Group Table are shown on this page The MVR Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by group Web Interface To display the MVR Groups Information in the web interface 1 Click Configuration MVR Groups Information 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 To Click the Refresh to refresh a entry of the MVR Groups Information 4 Click lt lt or gt gt to move to previous or next entry Figure 3 7 3 The MVR Groups Information MVR Groups Information Start fram WLAN 1 add group address 224 0 0 0 with 20 entries per page Port Members VLAN ID Groups 11213 415 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 No more entries Parameter description MVR Group Table Columns e VLANID VLAN ID of the group e Groups Group ID of the group displayed e Port Members Ports under this group e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt You can click them for refresh the MVR Group information by manual others for next up page or entry 118 3 7 4 Statistics The section describes the switch will d
151. delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Start IP address 281 Indicates the start IP address for the access management entry End IP address Indicates the end IP address for the access management entry HTTP HTTPS Indicates that the host can access the switch from HTTP HTTPS interface if the host IP address matches the IP address range provided in the entry SNMP Indicates that the host can access the switch from SNMP interface if the host IP address matches the IP address range provided in the entry TELNET SSH Indicates that the host can access the switch from TELNET SSH interface if the host IP address matches the IP address range provided in the entry Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 282 4 8 2 Statistics This section shows you a detailed statistics of the Access Management including HTTP HTTPS TELNET and SSH Web Interface To configure an Assess Management Statistics in the web interface 1 Checked Auto refresh Figure 4 8 2 The Access Management Statistics Access Management Statistics Interface Received Packets Allowed Packets Discarded Packets HTTP 0 0 0 HTTPS 0 0 0 SNMP 0 0 0 TELNET 0 0 0 SSH O 0 0 Parameter description e Interface The interface type through which the remote host can access the switch Received Packets
152. diosdeorsisnadecndaageerioubace 102 3 0 MLD SNOOPING A di id 104 3 6 1 BASIC Configurations iii a a edad 104 320 2 VEAN COnfi g rati on ia A EA als 107 3 6 3 Port Group Fl Bi A A a 109 DORA A A A A A A A 110 36 5 GTOUPINJO MAN ci a R i EAEAN R EEE Add EEA EER EE TEESE 112 3 650 IPv6 SSM Tnformati M Si A R E esses E AE A R E A EE EES 114 eTA DA o A E 115 3 7 1 CONNIBUTACON Si A EA EE EER TA EE EEE AE EE testes EEE TEESE 115 3 7 2 Port Group All O Wii nit Ta aida 117 SLA ES TAE ES E OR 119 3 8 ELDP toi odiado ade ani drid bot t 120 3 8 1 LEDP Config ration secan da ae 120 3 8 2 ELD PNCIGNDOUIS costa ii ae lada aaa 123 3 0 3 LEDP MED CONTIRUTALION E a ii ii ia 125 3 64 LED P MED NeCiQNDOUTS iii ts iaa aa 132 FOI FOLES IASC S o e A a cations ee sete ted ae takin ai Cae E eee eee ees 135 359 FILTERING DATABASE neriie hranirea ernearen a EE E iSe EENren AeA EEE S Earann 137 DAOC ONE UTAM ON AA RE E E RR 137 3 9 2 Dynamic MAC Tables sisi a E E E EEA E E EE E RE R EEE E 140 IAOMLA Naiara 141 3 01 VLAN Membership a e ias 14 SLO DIP OLS tothe seb at oe seen ets stalk Dea le PALES task Ra eee heehee aarti aks aie satay 143 e IO A ER EN 145 SADA OTE AUS A A lolas 147 SADO Private VLANS 0 aa E ea a a AE a EEAS E 149 3 10 5 1 Private VLANS Membership nerien aerisire inira iSe siS e EEEa Kea era aa esT 149 3 10 52 Pont Isolation arii e a e a a e ia dol aa aa a a e Ea E dol 150 3210 6 MAC based AAA A E AREA E E e EE E stevssageaseagvacevesv
153. e No more entries Parameter description MLDv2 Information Table Columns VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group Group Group address of the group displayed Port Switch port number Mode Indicates the filtering mode maintained per VLAN ID port number Group Address basis It can be either Include or Exclude Source Address IP Address of the source Currently system limits the total number of IP source addresses for filtering to be 128 Type Indicates the Type lt can be either Allow or Deny 114 3 7 MVR The MVR feature enables multicast traffic forwarding on the Multicast VLAN In a a PC or a television with a set top box can receive the multicast stream Multiple set top boxes or PCs can be connected to one subscriber port which is a switch port configured as an MVR receiver port When a subscriber selects a channel the set top box or PC sends an IGMP join message to Switch A to join the appropriate multicast Uplink ports that send and receive multicast data to and from the multicast VLAN are called MVR source ports multicast television application 3 7 1 Configuration The section describes user could set the MVR basic Configuration and some parameters in the switch Web Interface To configure the MLD Snooping Port Group Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration MVR Configuration 2 Scroll the MVR mode to enable or disable and Scroll to set all parameters
154. e Image The flash index name of the firmware image The name of primary preferred image is image the alternate image is named image bk e Version The version of the firmware image eo Date The date where the firmware was produced 289 NOTE 1 Incase the active firmware image is the alternate image only the Active Image table is shown In this case the Activate Alternate Image button is also disabled 2 If the alternate image is active due to a corruption of the primary image or by manual intervention uploading a new firmware image to the device will automatically use the primary image slot and activate this 3 The firmware version and date information may be empty for older firmware releases This does not constitute an error 290 5 3 Save Restore This section describes how to save and restore the Switch configuration including reset to Factory Defaults Save Start Save Users and Restore Users for any maintenance needs 5 3 1 Factory Defaults This section describes how to reset the Switch configuration to Factory Defaults Any configuration files or scripts will recover to factory default values Web Interface To configure a Factory Defaults Configuration in the web interface 1 Chick Factory Defaults 2 Click Yes Figure 5 3 1 The Factory Defaults Factory Defaults Are you sure you want to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults Parameter description e Buttons Y
155. e ee E 195 Parameter description Port The port number for which the configuration below applies Enable Controls whether the storm control is enabled on this switch port Rate Controls the rate for the storm control The default value is 500 This value is restricted to 100 1000000 when the Unit is kbps or fps and it is restricted to 1 10000 when the Unit is Mbps or kfps Unit Controls the unit of measure for the storm control rate as kbps Mbps fps or kfps The default value is kbps Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 196 3 14 14 WRED This page allows you to configure the Random Early Detection RED settings for queue 0 to 5 RED cannot be applied to queue 6 and 7 Through different RED configuration for the queues QoS classes it is possible to obtain Weighted Random Early Detection WRED operation between queues The settings are global for all ports in the switch RED Drop Probability Function The following illustration shows the drop probability function with associated parameters Drop Probability 100 Mao DP 3 Max DP 2 Max DP 1 Average Filing Leve Min Threshold 100 Max DP 1 3 is the drop probability when the average queue filling level is 100 Frames marked with Drop Precedence Level 0 are never dropped Min Threshold is the average queue filling lev
156. e for example no IP address is assigned to a second client while the first client s assignment is valid its lease has not expired Therefore IP address pool management is done by the server and not by a human network administrator Dynamic addressing simplifies network administration because the software keeps track of IP addresses rather than requiring an administrator to manage the task This means that a new computer can be added to a network without the hassle of manually assigning it a unique IP address DHCP Relay DHCP Relay is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain The DHCP option 82 enables a DHCP relay agent to insert specific information into a DHCP request packets when forwarding client DHCP packets to a DHCP server and remove the specific information from a DHCP reply packets when forwarding server DHCP packets to a DHCP client The DHCP server can use this information to implement IP address or other assignment policies Specifically the option works by setting two sub options Circuit ID option 1 and Remote ID option2 The Circuit ID sub option is supposed to include information specific to which circuit the request came in on The 302 Remote ID sub option was designed to carry information relating to the remote host end of the circuit The definition of Circuit ID in the switch is 4 bytes in length and the format is vlan_id mod
157. e Type Shows whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged frames This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If the port only accepts tagged frames untagged frames received on that port are discarded Tx Tag Shows egress filtering frame status whether tagged or untagged UVID Shows UVID untagged VLAN ID Port s UVID determines the packet s behaviour at the egress side Conflicts Shows status of Conflicts whether exists or not When a Volatile VLAN User requests to set VLAN membership or VLAN port configuration the following conflicts can occur Functional Conflicts between features Conflicts due to hardware limitation Direct conflict between user modules Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the VLAN Port Status information by manual 148 3 10 5 Private VLANs In a private VLAN communication between ports in that private VLAN is not permitted A VLAN can be configured as a private VLAN 3 10 5 1 Private VLANs Membership The Private VLAN membership configurations for the switch can be monitored and modified here Private VLANs can be added or deleted here Port members of each Private VLAN can be added or removed here Private VLANs are based on the source port mask and there are no connections to VLANs This means that VLAN IDs and Private VLAN IDs can be identical A port
158. e port both the Trap and the Shutdown actions described above will be taken o State This column shows the current state of the port as seen from the Limit Control s point of view The state takes one of four values Disabled Limit Control is either globally disabled or disabled on the port Ready The limit is not yet reached This can be shown for all actions Limit Reached Indicates that the limit is reached on this port This state can only be shown if Action is set to None or Trap Shutdown Indicates that the port is shut down by the Limit Control module This state can only be shown if Action is set to Shut down or Trap amp Shutdown e Re open Button If a port is shut down by this module you may reopen it by clicking this button which will only be enabled if this is the case For other methods refer to Shutdown in the Action section NoTE That clicking the reopen button causes the page to be refreshed so non committed changes will be lost e Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the Port Security information by manual e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 277 4 7 2 Switch Status This section shows the Port Security status Port Security is a module with no direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from other modules the user modules When a user module has enabled port security
159. e the access of that group By default setting most groups privilege level 5 has the read only access and privilege level 10 has the read write access And the system maintenance software upload factory defaults and etc need user privilege level 15 Generally the privilege level 15 can be used for an administrator account privilege level 10 for a standard user account and privilege level 5 for a guest account 2 3 2 Privilege Level This page provides an overview of the privilege levels The switch provides user set Account Aggregation Diagnostics EEE GARP GVRP IP IPMC Snooping LACP LLDP LLDP MED MAC Table MRP MVR MVRP Maintenance Mirroring POE Ports Private VLANs QoS SMTP SNMP Security Spanning Tree System Trap Event VCL VLANs Voice VLAN Privilege Levels from 1 to 15 Web Interface To configure Privilege Level in the web interface 1 Click SYSTEM Account Privilege Level 2 Specify the Privilege parameter 3 Click Apply Figure2 3 2 The Privilege Level configuration Privilege Level Configuration 10 4 10 e 110 4 110 4 10 110 e 10 4 10 e 110 10 4 10m 10 e 110 10 e 10 110 4 10 4 10 e 115 4 10 110 4 10 10 4 10 10 110 4 10 4 10 10 e 10 10 10 10 4 14 Parameter description Group Name The name identifying the privilege group In most cases a privilege level group consists of a single module e g LACP RSTP or QoS but a few of them
160. e values are Normal The VID of the two outer tags aren t swapped Tunnel The VID of the two outer tags are swapped so that the VID of the outer tag is taken from the Inner Tag configuration and the VID of the inner tag is the EVC VID In this mode the NNI ports are normally configured to do EVC classification based on the inner tag nner Tag VID The Inner tag VLAN ID The allowed range is from 0 through 4094 nner Tag PCP DEI Preservation The inner tag PCP and DEI preservation The possible values are Preserved The inner tag PCP and DEI is preserved Fixed The inner tag PCP and DEI is fixed e Inner Tag PCP The inner tag PCP value The allowed range is from 0 through 7 e Inner Tag DEI The inner tag DEI value The allowed value is 0 or 1 e Outer Tag VID The EVC outer tag VID for UNI ports The allowed range is from 0 through 4094 NNI Ports The list of Network to Network Interfaces for the EVC Oo Modification Buttons You can modify each EVC in the table using the following buttons 200 Edits the EVC row O Deletes the EVC O Adds new EVC e Buttons Auto refresh _ Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page Remove All Click to remove all EVCs 201 3 15 2 Statistics Web Interface Figure 3 15 2 The Loop Detection Configuration EVC Statistics To configure the EVC Statistics parameters in the web interface
161. ed PCP DEI values Default Use default PCP DEI values Mapped Use mapped versions of QoS class and DP level e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Cancel Click to cancel the changes 181 3 14 7 Port DSCP The section will teach user to set the QoS Port DSCP configuration that was allowed you to configure the basic QoS Port DSCP Configuration settings for all switch ports Others the settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To configure the QoS Port DSCP parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS Port DSCP 2 Evoke to enable or disable the Ingress Translate and Scroll the Classify Parameter configuration 3 Scroll to select Egress Rewrite parameters Click the Apply to save the setting If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 14 7 The QoS Port DSCP Configuration QoS Port DSCP Configuration oojoo glelelelg JGG x fie fie fie OOOO aa aa 55 lle x Jie fie fie opoo lt lt 10 ololololola Dio E A E A E A gE lt lt lt lt i lt 910 lt lt ofo Be a EEES Tiiarlla 182 Parameter description o Port The Port column shows the list of ports for which you can configure DSCP ingress and egress settings Ingress In Ingre
162. eed Configured Flow Control Maximum Frame sze Excessive Collision mode and Power Control 3 Click Apply Figure 3 1 1 The Port Configuration 35 Port Configuration 10056 10056 10056 10056 10056 OGbrs FDX Parameter description eo Port This is the logical port number for this row eo Link The current link state is displayed graphically Green indicates the link is up and red that it is down e Current Link Speed Provides the current link speed of the port e Configured Link Speed Select any available link speed for the given switch port Auto Speed selects the highest speed that is compatible with a link partner Disabled disables the switch port operation e Flow Control When Auto Speed is selected on a port this section indicates the flow control capability that is advertised to the link partner When a fixed speed setting is selected that is what is used The Current Rx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are obeyed and the Current Tx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are transmitted The Rx and Tx settings are determined by the result of the last Auto Negotiation Check the configured column to use flow control This setting is related to the setting for Configured Link Speed e Maximum Frame Size Enter the maximum frame size allowed for the switch port including FCS e Excessive Collision Mode Configure port transmit collision behavior Discard Di
163. eeded for a particular method The switch simply encapsulates the EAP part of the frame into the relevant type EAPOL or RADIUS and forwards it When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing a success or failure indication Besides forwarding this decision to the supplicant the switch uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port connected to the supplicant NoTE Suppose two backend servers are enabled and that the server timeout is configured to X seconds using the AAA configuration page and suppose that the first server in the list is currently down but not considered dead Now if the supplicant retransmits EAPOL Start frames at a rate faster than X seconds then it will never get authenticated because the switch will cancel on going backend authentication server requests whenever it receives a new EAPOL Start frame from the supplicant And since the server hasn t yet failed because the X seconds haven t expired the same server will be contacted upon the next backend authentication server request from the switch This scenario will loop forever Therefore the server timeout should be smaller than the supplicant s EAPOL Start frame retransmission rate Single 802 1X In port based 802 1X authentication once a supplicant is successfully authenticated on a port the whole port is opened for network traffic This allows other clients connected to the port for instance through a h
164. efresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals e Upper right icon Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately 236 Security This chapter describes all of the switch security configuration tasks to enhance the security of local network including IP Source Guard ARP Inspection DHCP Snooping AAA and etc 4 1 IP Source Guard The section describes to configure the IP Source Guard detail parameters of the switch You could use the IP Source Guard configure to enable or disable with the Port of the switch 4 1 1 Configuration This section describes how to configure IP Source Guard setting including Mode Enabled and Disabled Maximum Dynamic Clients 0 1 2 Unlimited Web Interface To configure an IP Source Guard Configuration in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Mode of IP Source Guard Configuration 2 Select Enabled of the specific port in the Mode of Port Mode Configuration 3 Select Maximum Dynamic Clients 0 1 2 Unlimited of the specific port in the Mode of Port Mode Configuration 4 Click Apply Figure 4 1 1 The IP Source Guard Configuration 237 IP Source Guard Configuration Mode Deia Y Translate dynamic to static Port Mode Configuration Port Mode Max Dynamic Clients i y Unlimited Unlimited y Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimi
165. el where the queues randomly start dropping frames The drop probability for frames marked with Drop Precedence Level n increases linearly from zero at Min Threshold average queue filling level to Max DP n at 100 average queue filling level Web Interface To configure the Weighted Random Early Detection Configuration parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS WRED Configuration Evoke to enable WRED Specify Min Threshold Max DP 1 Max DP 2 Max DP 3 Click the Apply to save the setting If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button oe Pe N It will revert to previously saved values 197 Figure 3 14 14 The WRED Configuration Weighted Random Early Detection Configuration Queue Enable Min Threshold Parameter description Port The port number for which the configuration below applies e Queue The queue number QoS class for which the configuration below applies e Enable Controls whether RED is enabled for this queue e Min Threshold Controls the lower RED threshold If the average queue filling level is below this threshold the drop probability is zero This value is restricted to 0 100 Oo Max DP 1 Controls the drop probability for frames marked with Drop Precedence Level 1 when the average queue filling level is 100 This value is restricted to 0 100 Oo Max DP 2 Controls the drop probability for frames mar
166. elected stack unit as reflected by the page header The left pane displays the Event status for the Local OAM unit while the right pane displays the status for the Peer for the respective port Web Interface To display the Link Events in the web interface Click Configuration 802 3ah OAM then Link Events Scroll to select which port you want to monitor the Link Events 1 2 3 4 Evoke auto refresh to update the detailed Link Events data Click the Refresh to update the Link Events Figure 3 20 4 The detailed Link OAM Port status Detailed Link OAM Link Status for Port 1 Port Auto refresh O Clear Local Frame Error Status Remote Frame Error Status Sequence Number 0 Frame Error Event Timestamp D Frame Error Event Timestamp 0 Frame error event window D Frame error event window 0 Frame error event threshold D Frame error event threshold 0 Frame errors 0 Frame errors 0 Total frame errors D Total frame errors 0 Total frame error events D Total frame error events 0 Local Frame Period Status Remote Frame Period Status Frame Period Error Event Timestamp D Frame Period Error Event Timestamp 0 Frame Period Error Event Window D Frame Period Error Event Window 0 Frame Period Error Event Threshold D Frame Period Error Event Threshold 0 Frame Period Errors D Frame Period Errors 0 Total frame period errors D Total
167. emergency calling Policies Network Policy Discovery enables the efficient discovery and diagnosis of mismatch issues with the VLAN configuration along with the associated Layer 2 and Layer 3 attributes which apply for a set of specific protocol applications on that port Improper network policy configurations are a very significant issue in VoIP environments that frequently result in voice quality degradation or loss of service Policies are only intended for use with applications that have specific real time network policy requirements such as interactive voice and or video services The network policy attributes advertised are 1 Layer 2 VLAN ID IEEE 802 1Q 2003 2 Layer 2 priority value IEEE 802 1D 2004 3 Layer 3 Diffserv code point DSCP value IETF RFC 2474 This network policy is potentially advertised and associated with multiple sets of application types supported on a given port The application types specifically addressed are 1 Voice 2 Guest Voice 3 Softphone Voice 4 Video Conferencing 5 Streaming Video 6 Control Signalling conditionally support a separate network policy for the media types above A large network may support multiple VoIP policies across the entire organization and different policies per application type LLDP MED allows multiple policies to be advertised per port each corresponding to a different application type Different ports on the same Network Connectivity Device may adv
168. ended to repeat the fast start transmission multiple 126 times to increase the possibility of the neighbours receiving the LLDP frame With Fast start repeat count it is possible to specify the number of times the fast start transmission would be repeated The recommended value is 4 times given that 4 LLDP frames with a 1 second interval will be transmitted when an LLDP frame with new information is received It should be noted that LLDP MED and the LLDP MED Fast Start mechanism is only intended to run on links between LLDP MED Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices and as such does not apply to links between LAN infrastructure elements including Network Connectivity Devices or other types of links Coordinates Location Latitude Latitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0 90 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to specify the direction to either North of the equator or South of the equator Longitude Longitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0 180 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to specify the direction to either East of the prime meridian or West of the prime meridian Altitude Altitude SHOULD be normalized to within 32767 to 32767 with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to select between two altitude types floors or meters Meters Representing meters of Altitude defined by the vertical datum specified Floors Representing altitude in a form more relevant in buildings whi
169. ent field significant ACK value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the ACK field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the ACK field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care e TCP URG Specify the TCP Urgent Pointer field significant URG value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the URG field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the URG field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care Ethernet Type Parameters The Ethernet Type parameters can be configured when Frame Type Ethernet Type is selected e EtherType Filter Specify the Ethernet type filter for this ACE Any No EtherType filter is specified EtherType filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific EtherType filter with this ACE you can enter a specific EtherType value A field for entering a EtherType value appears e Ethernet Type Value When Specific is selected for the EtherType filter you can enter a specific EtherType value The allowed range is 0x600 to OxFFFF but excluding 0x800 1Pv4 Ox806 ARP and Ox86DD I Pv6 A frame that hits this ACE matches this EtherType value 62 3 2 4 ACL Status The section describes how to shows the ACL status by different ACL users Each row describes the ACE that is defined It is a conflict if a specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitatio
170. ership configuration for the selected stack switch unit switch can be monitored and modified here Up to 4096 VLANs are supported This page allows for adding and deleting VLANs as well as adding and deleting port members of each VLAN Web Interface To configure VLAN membership configuration in the web interface 1 Click VLAN membership Configuration 2 Specify Management VLAN ID 0 4094 3 Click Save Figure 3 10 1 The VLAN Membership Configuration VLAN Membership Configuration Refresh Start from VLAN 1 with Lo entries per page Port Members VLAN ID VLAN Name Delete VLAN Membership Configuration Refresh Start from VLAN 1 with 20 entries per page Port Members Delete VLAN ID VLAN Name 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 0 1 fat MMMM MMIII m O EO O O O Add New VLAN Ca Parameter description e Delete To delete a VLAN entry check this box The entry will be deleted on the selected switch in the stack If none of the ports of this switch are members of a VLAN then the delete checkbox will be greyed out you cannot delete that entry during the next Save e VLANID Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN e VLAN Name 141 Indicates the name of VLAN VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers VLAN name should contain at least one alphabet VLAN name can be edited for t
171. ert to previously saved values 179 3 14 6 Port Tag Remarking The Section provides user to get an overview of QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking for all switch ports Others the ports belong to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To display the QoS Port Tag Remarking in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS Port Tag Remarking Figure 3 14 6 The Port Tag Remarking QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking Click the Port index to set the QoS Port Tag Remarking Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified 5 Classified Classified Classified QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking Port 1 Tag Remarking Mode i Mapped Parameter description Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure tag remarking e Mode Shows the tag remarking mode for this port Classified Use classified PCP DEI values Default Use default PCP DEI values Mapped Use mapped versions of QoS class and DP level 180 e Tag Remarking Mode To scroll to select the tag remarking mode for this port Classified Use classifi
172. ertake one of the following values Globally Disabled NAS is globally disabled Link Down NAS is globally enabled but there is no link on the port Authorized The port is in Force Authorized or a single supplicant mode and the supplicant is authorized Unauthorized The port is in Force Unauthorized or a single supplicant mode and the supplicant is not successfully authorized by the RADIUS server X Auth Y Unauth The port is in a multi supplicant mode Currently X clients are authorized and Y are unauthorized 0 Restart Two buttons are available for each row The buttons are only enabled when authentication is globally enabled and the port s Admin State is in an EAPOL based or MAC based mode Clicking these buttons will not cause settings changed on the page to take effect Reauthenticate Schedules a reauthentication whenever the quiet period of the port runs out EAPOL based authentication For MAC based authentication reauthentication will be attempted immediately The button only has effect for successfully authenticated clients on the port and will not cause the clients to get temporarily unauthorized Reinitialize Forces a reinitialization of the clients on the port and thereby a reauthentication immediately The clients will transfer to the unauthorized state while the reauthentication is in progress e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously save
173. ertise different sets of policies based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration It should be noted that LLDP MED is not intended to run on links other than between Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoints and therefore does not need to advertise the multitude of network policies that frequently run on an aggregated link interior to the LAN e Delete Check to delete the policy It will be deleted during the next save e Policy ID ID for the policy This is auto generated and shall be used when selecting the polices that shall be mapped to the specific ports e Application Type Intended use of the application types 1 Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications 2 Voice Signalling conditional for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signalling than for the voice media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Voice application policy 3 Guest Voice support a separate limited feature set voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting 129 interactive voice services 4 Guest Voice Signalling conditional for use i
174. es Click to Yes button to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults No Click to to return to the Port State page without resetting the configuration 291 5 3 2 Save Start This section describes how to save the Switch Start configuration Any current configuration files will be saved as XML format Web Interface To configure a Save Start Configuration in the web interface 1 Chick Save Start 2 Click Yes Figure 5 3 2 The Save Start configuration Save as Start Configuration Are you sure to save the current setting as Start Configuration Save Parameter description e Buttons Save Click the Save button to save current setting as Start Configuration 292 5 3 3 Save User This section describes how to save users information Any current configuration files will be saved as XML format Web Interface To configure a Save User Configuration in the web interface 1 Chick Save User 2 Click Yes Figure 5 3 3 The Save as Backup Configuration Save as Backup Configuration Are you sure to save the current setting as Backup Configuration Parameter description e Buttons Save Click the Save button to save current setting as Backup Configuration 293 5 3 4 Restore User This section describes how to restore user s information back to the switch Any current configuration files will be restored via XML format Web Interface To configure a Restore User Configurat
175. es are copied on The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number The default value is Disabled Mirror Specify the mirror operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are mirrored Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled 50 Logging Specify the logging operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are stored in the System Log Disabled Frames received on the port are not logged The default value is Disabled Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited Shutdown Specify the port shut down operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled If a frame is received on the port the port will be disabled Disabled Port shut down is disabled The default value is Disabled Counter Counts the number of frames that match this ACE Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Upper right icon Refresh clear You can click them for refresh the ACL Port Configuration or clear them by manual 51 3 2 2 Rate Limiters The section describes how to configure the switch s ACL Rate Limiter parameters The Rate Limiter Level from 1 to 16 that allow user to set rate limiter value and units with pps or kbps Web Interface To configure ACL Rate Limiter in the web in
176. eter description Port Members A check box is provided for each port of a private VLAN When checked port isolation is enabled on that port When unchecked port isolation is disabled on that port By default port isolation is disabled on all ports e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 150 3 10 6 MAC based VLAN MAC address based VLAN decides the VLAN for forwarding an untagged frame based on the source MAC address of the frame A most common way of grouping VLAN members is by port hence the name port based VLAN Typically the device adds the same VLAN tag to untagged packets that are received through the same port Later on these packets can be forwarded in the same VLAN Port based VLAN is easy to configure and applies to networks where the locations of terminal devices are relatively fixed As mobile office and wireless network access gain more popularity the ports that terminal devices use to access the networks are very often non fixed A device may access a network through Port A this time but through Port B the next time If Port A and Port B belong to different VLANs the device will be assigned to a different VLAN the next time it accesses the network As a result it will not be able to use the resources in the old VLAN On the other hand if Port A and Port B belong to the same VLAN after terminal devices access the network thro
177. etting for this ACE No Pv4 frames where the options flag is set must not be able to match this entry Yes Pv4 frames where the options flag is set must be able to match this entry 59 Any Any value is allowed don t care e SIP Filter Specify the source IP filter for this ACE Any No source IP filter is specified Source IP filter is don t care Host Source IP filter is set to Host Specify the source IP address in the SIP Address field that appears Network Source IP filter is set to Network Specify the source IP address and source IP mask in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear e SIP Address When Host or Network is selected for the source IP filter you can enter a specific SIP address in dotted decimal notation eo SIP Mask When Network is selected for the source IP filter you can enter a specific SIP mask in dotted decimal notation e DIP Filter Specify the destination IP filter for this ACE Any No destination IP filter is specified Destination IP filter is don t care Host Destination IP filter is set to Host Specify the destination IP address in the DIP Address field that appears Network Destination IP filter is set to Network Specify the destination IP address and destination IP mask in the DIP Address and DIP Mask fields that appear e DIP Address When Host or Network is selected for the destination IP filter you can enter a specific DIP address in dotted deci
178. face 1 Click Configuration Loop protection Status 2 Evoke to select enable or disable the auto refresh 3 Click the refresh to clear or update the record of Loop protection Figure 3 16 2 The Loop Protection Status Loop Protection Status Auto refresh CI Parameter description o Port The switch port number of the logical port e Action The currently configured port action e Transmit The currently configured port transmit mode 206 Loops The number of loops detected on this port Status The current loop protection status of the port Loop Whether a loop is currently detected on the port Time of Last Loop The time of the last loop event detected Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto Refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals 207 3 17 Mirroring You can mirror traffic from any source port to a target port for real time analysis You can then attach a logic analyzer or RMON probe to the target port and study the traffic crossing the source port in a completely unobtrusive manner Mirror Configuration is to monitor the traffic of the network For example we assume that Port A and Port B are Monitoring Port and Monitored Port respectively thus the traffic received by Port B will be copied to Port A for monitoring Web Interface To configure the Mirror in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Mirroring 2 Scroll to select Po
179. from the port is forwarded for normal processing IGMP filtering controls only IGMP membership join reports and has no relationship to the function that directs the forwarding of IP multicast traffic Web Interface To configure the IGMP Snooping Port Group Configuration in the web interface Click Configuration IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering Click Add new Filtering Group Scroll the Port to enable the Port Group Filtering Specify the Filtering Groups in the blank field Click the save to save the setting If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button E ee It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 5 3 The I GMP Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration Delete Port Filtering Groups Add new Filtering Group IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration Port eee Ja pete a Groups 97 Parameter description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save Port To evoke the port enable the IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering function e Filtering Groups The IP Multicast Group that will be filtered e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 98 3 5 4 Status After you complete the IGMP Snooping configuration then you could to let the switch display the I
180. g Multiplexer State Parser State Forwarding Parser State Organizational Unique 00 40 c7 Organizational Unique Identification Identification PDU Revision 0 PDU Revision Parameter description o PDU Permission This field is available only for the Local DTE It displays the current permission rules set for the local DTE Possible values are Link fault Receive only Information exchange only ANY e Discovery State The field will display the current state of the discovery process The possible states are includes Fault state Active state Passive state SEND LOCAL REMOTE STATE SEND_LOCAL_REMOTE_ OK_STATE SEND_ANY_STATE e Remote MAC Address The field will show which device join the OAM and its MAC address e Mode The field will show the Mode in which the Link OAM is operating Active or Passive e Unidirectional Operation Support The field will show the status of this configuration is retrieved from the PHY This feature is not available to be configured by the user e Remote Loopback Support If status is enabled DTE is capable of OAM remote loopback mode The field will show 219 enabled Link Monitoring Support If status is enabled DTE supports interpreting Link Events The field will show enabled MIB Retrieval Support If status ie enabled DTE supports sending Variable Response OAMPDUs The field will show enabled MTU Size It represents the largest OAMPDU in o
181. g Policer ID Filter Policer ID Value Apply Parameter description eo EVCID The EVC ID identifies the EVC The range is from 1 through 128 o VID The VLAN ID in the PB network It may be inserted in a C tag S tag or S custom tag depending on the NNI port VLAN configuration The range is from 1 through 4094 199 o VID The Internal classified VLAN ID in the PB network The range is from 1 through 4094 e Learning The learning mode for the EVC controls whether source MAC addresses are learned for frames matching the EVC Learning may be disabled if the EVC only includes two UNI NNI ports The possible values are Enabled Learning is enabled MAC addresses are learned Disabled Learning is disabled MAC addresses are not learned e Policer ID The ingress bandwidth profile mode for the EVC The possible values are Specific The range is from 1 through 128 Discard All received frames are discarded for the EVC None None bandwidth profile for the EVC nner Tag Type The inner tag type is used to determine whether an inner tag is inserted in frames forwarded to NNI ports The possible values are None An inner tag is not inserted C tag An inner C tag is inserted S tag An inner S tag is inserted S custom tag An inner tag is inserted and the tag type is determined by the VLAN port configuration of the NNI nner VID Mode The inner VID Mode affects the VID in the inner and outer tag The possibl
182. g automatically e Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt You can click them for refresh the IGMP Group Status by manual others for next up page or entry 113 3 6 6 IPv6 SSM Information The section describes the user to configure the Entries in the MLDv2 Information Table are shown on this page The MLDv2 Information Table is sorted first by VLAN ID then by group and then by Port No Different source addresses belong to the same group are treated as single entry Each page shows up to 64 entries from the MLDv2 SSM Source Specific Multicast Information table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MLDv2 Information Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MLDv2 Information Table Web Interface To display the MLDv2 IPv6 SSM Information in the web interface 1 Click Configuration MLD Snooping Pv6 SSM Information 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh a entry of the MLDv2 Pv6 SSM Information 4 Click lt lt or gt gt to move to previous or next entry Figure 3 6 6 The MLD I Pv6 SFM Information MLD SFM Information Start from VLAN 1 and Group 00 with 20 entries per page VLAN ID Group Port Mode Source Address Typ
183. g point in the VLAN Table Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the next closest VLAN Table match Web Interface To configure the IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration 2 Evoke to select enable or disable Snooping IGMP Querier Specify the parameters in the blank field 3 Click the refresh to update the data or click lt lt or gt gt to display previous entry or next entry Click the save to save the setting If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 5 2 The I GMP Snooping VLAN Configuration IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration k Start from VLAN 1 with 20 entries per page VLAN ID Snooping Enabled IGMP Querier Compatibility RV QI sec QRI 0 1 sec LLQI 0 1 sec URI sec 1 O l g 3 E 3 A Parameter description e VLANID It displays the VLAN ID of the entry Snooping Enabled Enable the per VLAN IGMP Snooping Only up to 32 VLANs can be selected I GMP Querier A router sends IGMP Query messages onto a particular link This Router is called the Querier Enable the IGMP Querier in the VLAN Compatibility Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appropriate actions depending on the versions of IGMP operating on hosts and routers within a network The allowed
184. gaming and allows more efficient use of resources when supporting these uses IGMP Querier IMAP IPMC A router sends IGMP Query messages onto a particular link This router is called the Querier IMAP is an acronym for Internet Message Access Protocol It is a protocol for email clients to retrieve email messages from a mail server IMAP is the protocol that IMAP clients use to communicate with the servers and SMTP is the protocol used to transport mail to an IMAP server The current version of the Internet Message Access Protocol is IMAP4 It is similar to Post Office Protocol version 3 POP3 but offers additional and more complex features For example the IMAP4 protocol leaves your email messages on the server rather than downloading them to your computer If you wish to remove your messages from the server you must use your mail client to generate local folders copy messages to your local hard drive and then delete and expunge the messages from the server IP is an acronym for Internet Protocol It is a protocol used for communicating data across an internet network IP is a best effort system which means that no packet of information sent over is assured to reach its destination in the same condition it was sent Each device connected to a Local Area Network LAN or Wide Area Network WAN is given an Internet Protocol address and this IP address is used to identify the device uniquely among all other devices connected
185. ggregation mode function 3 Evoke Aggregation Group ID and Port members 4 Click the Apply to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 3 1 1 The Aggregation Mode Configuration 65 Aggregation Mode Configuration Hash Code Contributors Source MAC Address Destination MAC Address IP Address TCP UDP Port Number Aggregation Group Configuration Port Members Group ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Parameter description Hash Code Contributors e Source MAC Address The Source MAC address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the Source MAC address or uncheck to disable By default Source MAC Address is enabled eo Destination MAC Address The Destination MAC Address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the Destination MAC Address or uncheck to disable By default Destination MAC Address is disabled o IP Address The IP address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the IP Address or uncheck to disable By default IP Address is enabled e TCP UDP Port Number The TCP UDP port number can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Chec
186. ght saving function will not be activated Time Set Offset Provide the Daylight saving time set offset The offset is given in minutes east of GMT The valid range is from 1 to 1440 minutes default is 60 mins Daylight Savings Type Provide the Daylight savings type selection You can select By Dates or Recurring two type for Daylight saving type From To configure when Daylight saving start date and time the format is YYYY MM DD HH MM To To configure when Daylight saving end date and time the format is YYYY MM DD HH MM Note The under from and to was displayed what you set on the From and To field information 2 2 2 NTP NTP is Network Time Protocol and is used to sync the network time based Greenwich Mean Time GMT If use the NTP mode and select a built in NTP time server or manually specify an user defined NTP server as well as Time Zone the switch will sync the time in a short after pressing lt Apply gt button Though it synchronizes the time automatically NTP does not update the time periodically without user s processing Time Zone is an offset time off GMT You have to select the time zone first and then perform time sync via NTP because the switch will combine this time zone offset and updated NTP time to come out the local time otherwise you will not able to get the correct time The switch supports configurable time zone from 12 to 13 step 1 hou
187. gress filtering rules to each port There are two ingress filtering rules which can be applied to the switch The Ingress Filtering Rule 1 is forward only packets with VID matching this port s configured VID The Ingress Filtering Rule 2 is drop untagged frame You can also select the Role of each port as Access Trunk or Hybrid Web Interface To configure VLAN Port configuration in the web interface 1 Click VLAN Port Configuration 2 Specify the VLAN Port Configuration parameters 3 Click Apply Figure 3 10 2 The VLAN Port Configuration Ethertype for Custom S ports Ox VLAN Port Configuration iI aA q6 i KK i E Unaware Y Unaware Y Unaware Y Unaware Y Unaware Y Unaware Y S R i K3 ES i A NN ESSE es Mes Es 2 aL i ag MES WES NS MES WES MC MCS MCS MES WES fs WES WES WES CS MES WES WE WES WE pis ls 143 i i K3 KA K3 A i sis fis fic fic fis il lt REECE CEE CELL LD A an Es Es E Js ps Es Parameter description Ethertype for Custom S ports This field specifies the ether type used for Custom S ports This is a global setting for all the Custom S ports Custom Ethertype enables the user to change the Ethertype value on a port to any value to support network devices that do not use the standard 0x8100 Ethertype field value on 802 1Q tagged or 802 1p tagged frames Port This is the logical port number of this
188. gure 3 6 5 The MLD Snooping Groups I nformation MLD Snooping Groups Information Auto refre Start from VLAN 1 and group address 00 with 20 entries per page Port Members VLAN ID Groups 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 45 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 No more entries Parameter description Navigating the MLD Group Table Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MLD Group table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MLD Group Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MLD Group Table Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the next closest MLD Group Table matches In addition the two input fields will upon a button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address The will use the last entry of the currently displayed as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the button to start over MLD Snooping Information Table Columns VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group Groups Group address of the group displayed Port Members Ports under this group 112 e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the lo
189. gure DHCP Relay setting including Relay Mode Enabled and Disabled Relay Server IP setting Relay Information Mode Enabled and Disabled Relay Information Mode Policy Replace Keep and Drop Web Interface To configure a DHCP Relay in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Relay Mode of DHCP Relay Configuration 2 Specify Relay Server IP address 3 Select Enabled in the Relay Information Mode of DHCP Relay Configuration Specify Relay Replace Keep and Drop in the Relay Information Mode of DHCP Relay Configuration Click Apply Figure 4 4 1 The DHCP Relay Statistics DHCP Relay Configuration Relay Mode Relay Server Relay Information Mode Relay Information Policy Replace v Apply Parameter description e Relay Mode Indicates the DHCP relay mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable DHCP relay mode operation When DHCP relay mode operation is enabled the agent forwards and transfers DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not in the same subnet domain And the DHCP broadcast message won t be flooded for security considerations Disabled Disable DHCP relay mode operation e Relay Server Indicates the DHCP relay server IP address A DHCP relay agent is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not in the same subnet domain e Relay Information Mode 250 Indicates the DHCP re
190. hanges made locally and revert to previously saved values Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the refresh information by manual 227 3 22 EPS The chapter describes the Ethernet Protection Switching EPS The switch supports the Ethernet Linear Protection Switch instances are configured here Web Interface To configure the EPS in the web interface 1 Click Configuration EPS 2 Click Add new EPS then you can create new EPS entry on the switch 3 Assign each parameter to add new EPS 4 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values 5 Click Refresh then switch will update the EPS table by manually Figure 3 22 The EPS Configuration Ethernet Protection Switching Domain Architecture W Flow P Flow W SF MEP P SF MEP APS MEP Alarm Add New EPS Apply Ethernet Protection Switching Delete EPSID Domain Architecture W Flow P Flow WSF MEP PSF MEP APS MEP Alarm ro Se Se IO IAN be 1 Parameter description e Delete This box is used to mark a EPS for deletion in next Save operation e EPSID The ID of the EPS Click on the ID of an EPS to enter the configuration page e Domain You can scroll to select the domain with Port Esp Evc and Mpls Port This will create an EPS in the Port Domain W P Flow
191. he existing VLAN entries or it can be added to the new entries O Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each VLAN ID To include a port in a VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked e Adding a New VLAN Click to add a new VLAN ID An empty row is added to the table and the VLAN can be configured as needed Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The VLAN is enabled on the selected stack switch unit when you click on Save The VLAN is thereafter present on the other stack switch units but with no port members The check box is greyed out when VLAN is displayed on other stacked switches but user can add member ports to it AVLAN without any port members on any stack unit will be deleted when you click Save The button can be used to undo the addition of new VLANs e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values e Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt You can click them for refresh the VLAN entries by manual Or press clear to clean up the VLAN table Others press lt lt or gt gt to upper or down page of the table 142 3 10 2 Ports The function in VLAN Tag Rule Setting user can input VID number to each port The range of VID number is from 1 to 4094 User also can choose in
192. header Web Interface To display GARP Port statistics in the web interface 1 Click GARP statistics 2 Scroll which port you want to display the GARP Counter information 3 Click Refresh to modify the GARP statistics information Figure 3 12 2 The GARP Port Statistics GARP Port Statistics Port Peer MAC Failed Count The Port column shows the list of all ports for which per port GARP statistics are shown Peer MAC is MAC address of the neighbour Switch from with GARP frame is received Parameter description Port e Peer MAC e Failed Count Explain Failed count here e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the GARP Port Statistics information by manual 165 3 13 GVRP GVRP is an application based on Generic Attribute Registration Protocol GARP mainly used to automatically and dynamically maintain the group membership information of the VLANs The GVRP offers the function providing the VLAN registration service through a GARP application It makes use of GARP Information Declaration GID to maintain the ports associated with their attribute database and GARP Information Propagation GIP to communicate among switches and end stations With GID information and GIP GVRP st
193. his counter can occur at re initialization of the management system Rx and Tx Unique Error Event Notification A count of the number of unique Event OAMPDUs received and transmitted on this interface Event Notifications may be sent in duplicate to increase the probability of successfully being received given the possibility that a frame may be lost in transit Duplicate Event Notification transmissions are counted by Duplicate Event Notification counters for Tx and Rx respectively A unique Event Notification OAMPDU is indicated as an Event Notification OAMPDU with a Sequence Number field that is distinct from the previously transmitted Event Notification OAMPDU Sequence Number Rx and Tx Duplicate Error Event Notification A count of the number of duplicate Event OAMPDUs received and transmitted on this interface Event Notification OAMPDUs may be sent in duplicate to increase the probability of successfully being received given the possibility that a frame may be lost in transit A duplicate Event Notification OAMPDU is indicated as an Event Notification OAMPDU with a Sequence Number field that is identical to the previously transmitted Event Notification OAMPDU Sequence Number Rx and Tx Loopback Control 224 A count of the number of Loopback Control OAMPDUs received and transmitted on this interface Rx and Tx Variable Request A count of the number of Variable Request OAMPDUs received and transmitted on this interface
194. iate actions depending on the versions of MLD operating on hosts and routers within a network The allowed selection is MLD Auto Forced MLDv1 Forced MLDv2 default compatibility value is MLD Auto Rv Robustness Variable The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a network The allowed range is 1 to 255 default robustness variable value is 2 Qi Query Interval The Query Interval is the interval between General Queries sent by the Querier The allowed range is 1 to 31744 seconds default query interval is 125 seconds QRI 107 Query Response Interval The Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into the periodic General Queries The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default query response interval is 100 in tenths of seconds 10 seconds LLQI LMQI for IGMP Last Listener Query Interval The Last Listener Query Interval is the Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into Multicast Address Specific Queries sent in response to Version 1 Multicast Listener Done messages It is also the Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into Multicast Address and Source Specific Query messages The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default last listener query interval is 10 in tenths of seconds 1 second URI Unsolicited Report Interval The Unsolicited Report Interval i
195. icers are enabled e Unit Controls the unit of measure for the queue policer rate as kbps or Mbps The default value is kbps This field is only shown if at least one of the queue policers is enabled eo Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 173 3 14 4 Port Scheduler This section provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Schedulers for all switch ports and the ports belong to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To display the QoS Port Schedulers in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS Port Schedulers 2 Display the QoS Egress Port Schedulers Figure 3 14 4 The QoS Egress Port Schedules QoS Egress Port Sched Click the Port index to set the QoS Egress Port Schedulers 174 QoS Egress Port Scheduler and Shapers Port 1 Poti Y Scheduler Mode Strict rio y Queue Shaper l Port Shaper Enable Rate Unit Excess Enable Rate Unit If you select the scheduler mode with weighted then the screen will change as the fiaure 6 6 g O 6 5 Apply J Reset Cancel Parameter description Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure the schedulers e Mode Shows the scheduling mode for
196. icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the Protocol Group Mapping information by manual 158 3 11 VLAN Translation VLAN Translation allows traffic from one VLAN to be transported across a different VLAN Packet VLAN IDs from the original VLAN are changed at the ingress port of the translating VLAN When the packets reach the egress point on the translating VLAN the VLAN ID is translated back to the original ID This feature is useful for service providers who must carry traffic from different customers across their network while preserving the VLAN information ID and priority 3 11 1 Port to Group Mapping This page allows you to map set of Port members to a Group ID for all switch ports Web Interface To Display Port to Group mapping table configured in the web interface 1 Click Configuration VLAN Translation and Port to Group mapping 2 To click the icon to change import group ID to new group ID 3 Click Apply Figure 3 11 1 The Port to Group mapping table Auto refresh O Port to Group mapping Table O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 0 0 0 0 LO 0 LO OJO LO OF LO LO LO O LO lO 0 LO lO lO OJO OF 0 0 OLOLO LO LO LO LOL LO LO LO LO LO LO LO LO LO LO LO oo O LO JO OJO OOO OOO LO lO lO 0 OF LO lO lO O lO lO O lO lO LO OF OO lO lO O OOOO OJOOLOLO
197. ified application type is currently unknown Defined The network policy is defined TAG TAG is indicative of whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an untagged VLAN Can be Tagged or Untagged Untagged The device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 Tagged The device is using the IEEE 802 10 tagged frame format VLAN ID VLAN ID is the VLAN identifier VID for the port as defined in IEEE 802 1Q 2003 A value of 1 through 4094 is used to define a valid VLAN ID A value of 0 Priority Tagged is used if the device is using priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 meaning that only the IEEE 802 1D priority level is significant and the default PVID of the ingress port is used instead Priority Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type One of the eight priority levels 0 through 7 DSCP DSCP is the DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 Contain one of 64 code point values 0 through 63 134 3 8 5 Port Statistics Two types of counters are shown Global counters are counters that refer to the whole stack switch while local counters refer to per port counters for the currently selected switch Web Interface To show LLDP Statistics 1 Click LLDP then click Port Statistics to show LLDP counters 2 Cli
198. igure SNMP trap To create a new trap account please check lt No number gt button and enter the trap information then check lt Apply gt Max Group Number 6 Web Interface To configure SNMP Trap setting Click SNMP Trap Display the SNMP Trap Hosts information table Choice a entry to display and modify the detail parameters or click delete button to delete the trap hosts entry Figure 2 6 8 The SNMP Trap Host Configuration Trap Hosts Configuration Severity Security Authentication Privacy Level Level Protocol Protocol Delete No Version Server IP UDP Port Community Security Name Trap Host hla Trap Version UDP Port es Community Security Name Severity Level ino Security Level NoAuth NoPriv v Authentication Protocol Authentication Password PrivacyProtocol M Privacy Password Parameters description e Delete Check lt Delete gt entry then check lt Save gt button the entry will be delete e Trap Version You may choose v1 v2c or v3 trap Server IP To assign the SNMP Host IP address 33 UDP Port To assign Port number Default 162 Community Security Name The length of Community Security Name string is restricted to 1 32 Security Level Indicates what kind of message will send to Security Level Possible modes are Info Send informations warnings and errors Warning Send warnings and errors Error Send errors Securi
199. igure the Spanning Tree MSTI Mapping parameters in the web interface Click Configuration Spanning Tree MSTI Mapping 2 Specify the configuration identification parameters in the field Specify the VLANs Mapped blank field Click the save to save the setting 4 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 4 2 The MSTI Configuration MSTI Configuration Add VLANs separated by spaces or comma Unmapped VLANs are mapped to the CIST The default bridge instance Configuration Identification Configuration Name 00 40 f6 9e 07 d0 Configuration Revision 0 MSTI Mapping VLANs Mapped 78 Parameter description Configuration Identification e Configuration Name The name identifying the VLAN to MSTI mapping Bridges must share the name and revision see below as well as the VLAN to MSTI mapping configuration in order to share spanning trees for MSTI s Intra region The name is at most 32 characters e Configuration Revision The revision of the MSTI configuration named above This must be an integer between 0 and 65535 MSTI Mapping o MSTI The bridge instance The CIST is not available for explicit mapping as it will receive the VLANs not explicitly mapped e VLANs Mapped The list of VLANs mapped to the MSTI The VLANs must be separated w
200. in a prioritized way highest top to lowest bottom Default the table is empty An ingress frame will only get a hit on one ACE even though there are more matching ACEs The first matching ACE will take action permit deny on that frame and a counter associated with that ACE is incremented An ACE can be associated with a Policy 1 ingress port or any ingress port the whole switch If an ACE Policy is created then that Policy can be associated with a group of ports under the Ports web page There are number of parameters that can be configured with an ACE Read the Web page help text to get further information for each of them The maximum number of ACEs is 64 ACL Ports The ACL Ports configuration is used to assign a Policy ID to an ingress port This is useful to group ports to obey the same traffic rules Traffic Policy is created under the Access Control List page You can you also set up specific traffic properties Action Rate Limiter Port copy etc for each ingress port They will though only apply if the frame gets past the ACE matching without getting matched In that case a counter associated with that port is incremented See the Web page help text for each specific port property ACL Rate Limiters Under this page you can configure the rate limiters There can be 15 different rate limiters each ranging from 1 1024K packets per seconds Under Ports and Access Control List web pages you can assign a Rate Limiter ID to the
201. initial operEdge state when a port is initialized e lt AutoEdge Controls whether the bridge should enable automatic edge detection on the bridge port This allows operEdge to be derived from whether BPDU s are received on the port or not o Restricted Role If enabled causes the port not to be selected as Root Port for the CIST or any MSTI even if it has the best spanning tree priority vector Such a port will be selected as an Alternate Port after the Root Port has been selected If set it can cause lack of spanning tree connectivity It can be set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network influence the spanning tree active topology possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator This feature is also known as Root Guard o Restricted TCN If enabled causes the port not to propagate received topology change notifications and topology changes to other ports If set it can cause temporary loss of connectivity after changes in a spanning tree s active topology as a result of persistently incorrect learned station location information It is set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network causing address flushing in that region possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator or the physical link state of the attached LANs transits frequently eo BPDU Guard If enabled
202. ion in the web interface 1 Chick Restore User 2 Click Yes Figure 5 3 4 The Restore the Backup Configuration Restore Backup Configuration Are you sure to restore the Backup Configuration Parameter description e Buttons Save Click the Save button to restore the Backup Configuration to the switch 294 5 4 Export Import This section describes how to export and import the Switch configuration Any current configuration files will be exported as XML format 5 4 1 Export Config This section describes to export the Switch Configuration for maintenance needs Any current configuration files will be exported as XML format Web Interface To configure an Export Config Configuration in the web interface 1 Chick Save configuration 2 Save the file in your device Figure 5 4 1 The Restore the Backup Configuration Configuration Save Save configurati Parameter description Save Click the Save button to store the Configuration to the PC or Server 5 4 2 Import Config This section describes to export the Switch Configuration for maintenance needs Any current configuration files will be exported as XML format Web Interface To configure an Import Config Configuration in the web interface 1 Chick Browser to select the config file in you device 2 Click Upload Figure 5 4 2 The I mport Config Configuration Upload Browse Upload 295 Parameter description e
203. ion protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted communication via the browser Web Interface To configure a HTTPS Configuration in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Mode of HTTPS Configuration 2 Select Enabled in the Automatic Redirect of HTTPS Configuration 3 Click Apply Figure 4 10 1 The HTTPS Configuration HTTPS Configuration Mode Automatic Redirect Apply Enabled v Disabled w Parameter description e Mode Indicates the HTTPS mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable HTTPS mode operation Disabled Disable HTTPS mode operation e Automatic Redirect Indicates the HTTPS redirect mode operation Automatically redirect web browser to HTTPS when HTTPS mode is enabled Possible modes are Enabled Enable HTTPS redirect mode operation Disabled Disable HTTPS redirect mode operation 285 4 11 Auth Method This page shows how to configure a user with authenticated when he logs into the switch stack via one of the management client interfaces Web Interface To configure an Authentication Method Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify the Client console telnet ssh web which you want to monitor 2 Specify the Authentication Method none local radius tacacs 3 Checked Fallback 4 Click Apply Figure 4 11 1 The HTTPS Configuration Authentication Method Configuration Client Authentication Method F
204. is kbps Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 176 3 14 5 Port Shaping This section provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Shaping for all switch ports Others the user could get all detail information of the ports belong to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To display the QoS Port Shapers in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS Port Shapers 2 Display the QoS Egress Port Shapers Figure 3 14 5 The QoS Egress Port Shapers QoS Egress Port Shapers Click the Port index to set the QoS Egress Port Shapers 177 QoS Egress Port Scheduler and Shapers Port 1 Poti m Scheduler Mode Strict Priority v Queue Shaper Port Shaper Enable Rate Unit Excess Enable Rate Unit If you select the scheduler mode with weighted then the screen will change as the fiaure Qo 8 8 ow j ow 30 10 9 8 ow OW ow O Parameter description Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure the shapers Shapers Qn Shows disabled or actual queue shaper rate e g 800 Mbps e Shapers Port Shows disabled or actual port shaper rate e g 800 Mbps e Scheduler Mode Controls whether the
205. is default and tells you the basic information of the system including Model Name System Description Contact Device Name System Up Time BIOS Version Firmware Version Hardware Mechanical Version Serial Number Host IP Address Host Mac Address Device Port RAM Size Flash Size and With this information you will know the software version used MAC address serial number how many ports good and so on This is helpful while malfunctioning 2 1 1 Information The switch system information is provided here Web interface To configure System Information in the web interface 1 Click SYSTEM System and Information 2 Specify the contact information for the system administrator as well as the name and location of the switch Also indicate the local time zone by configuring the appropriate offset 3 Click Refresh Figure 2 1 1 System Information System Information Model Name SW24GF4TG System Description 20 Port GbE SFP 4 Port Combo TP SFP 4 Port 10G SFP L2 Ethernet Switch Location Contact Device Name SW24GF4TG System Date 2011 01 01 00 34 07 System Uptime Od 00 34 07 BIOS Version v1 00 Firmware Version v1 29 Hardware Mechanical Version v1 01 v1 01 Series Number 033801000056 Host IP Address 192 168 1 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway
206. is entry should belong to Possible privacy protocols are None No privacy protocol DES An optional flag to indicate that this user uses DES authentication protocol e Privacy Password A string identifying the privacy password phrase The allowed string length is 8 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 27 2 6 5 Groups The function is used to configure SNMPv3 group The Entry index key are Security Model and Security Name To create a new group account please check lt Add new group gt button and enter the group information then check lt Save gt Max Group Number v1 2 v2 2 v3 10 Web Interface To display the configure SNMP Groups in the web interface 1 Click SNMP Groups 2 Specify the Privilege parameter 3 Click Apply Figure 2 6 5 The SNMP Groups Configuration SNMPv3 Groups Configuration Delete Security Model Security Name Group Name Add new group Apply SNMPv3 Groups Configuration Delete Security Model Security Name Group Name Dace usa UserlOl g Apply Parameter description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Security Model Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are v1 Reserved for SNMPv1 v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c usm User based Security Model USM e Security Name A string identifying the security
207. is port the default is 500 Unit To scroll to select what unit of rate includes kbps Mbps fps and kfps The default is kbps Flow Control To evoke to enable or disable flow control on port 171 e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 172 3 14 3 Queue Policers This page allows you to configure the Queue Policer settings for all switch ports Web Interface To display the QoS Port Schedulers in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS Queue Policing 2 Evoke which queue need to enable the QoS Ingress Queue Policers 3 Scroll to select the Rate limit Unit with kbps Mbps fps and kfps 4 Click Apply to save the configuration Figure 3 16 3 The QoS Ingress Port Policers Configuration QoS Ingress Queue Policers Queue0 Queue1 Queue2 Queue3 Queue4 Queue5 Queue6 Queue7 Enable Enable OOOO OJO O OJO m OJO O OJO ODIO IDO OOOO OO 5 E E JO i O O SODIO 3 J Parameter description Port The port number for which the configuration below applies e Enabled Controls whether the queue policer is enabled on this switch port eo Rate Controls the rate for the queue policer The default value is 500 This value is restricted to 100 1000000 when the Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 10000 when the Unit is Mbps This field is only shown if at least one of the queue pol
208. isplay the MVR detail Statistics after you had configured MVR on the switch Information Web Interface To display the MVR Statistics Information in the web interface 1 Click Configuration MVR Statistics 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh It provides the detail 3 3 To Click the Refresh to refresh a entry of the MVR Statistics Information 4 Click lt lt or gt gt to move to previous or next entry Figure 3 7 4 The MVR Statistics Information MVR Statistics VLAN p V1 Reports V2 Reports V3 Reports V2 Leaves Received Received Received Received 100 O 0 0 O Parameter description e VLANID The Multicast VLAN ID V1 Reports Received The number of Received V1 Reports V2 Reports Received The number of Received V2 Reports V3 Reports Received The number of Received V3 Reports V2 Leaves Received The number of Received V2 Leaves e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt You can click them for refresh the MVR Group information by manual others for next up page or entry 119 MVR Statistics 3 8 LLDP The switch supports the LLDP For current information on your switch model The Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP provides a standards based meth
209. ith comma and or space A VLAN can only be mapped to one MSTI An unused MSTI should just be left empty l e not having any VLANs e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 79 3 4 3 MSTI Priorities When you implement an Spanning Tree protocol on the switch that the bridge instance The CIST is the default instance which is always active For controls the bridge priority Lower numeric values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridege Identifier The section describes it allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority configurations and possibly change them as well Web Interface To configure the Spanning Tree MSTI Priorities parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Spanning Tree MSTI Priorities 2 Scroll the Priority maximum is 240 Default is 128 3 Click the Apply to save the setting 4 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 4 3 The MSTI Configuration MSTI Configuration MSTI Priority Configuration Apply Parameter description eo MSTI The bridge instance The CIST is the default instance which is always active eo Priority
210. ity name than a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community string In addition to community string a particular range of source addresses can be used to restrict source subnet Mode Indicates the Set Community mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable Set Community Disabled Disable Set Community Buttons Apply Click to apply changes 24 2 6 3 Communities The function is used to configure SNMPv3 communities The Community and UserName is unique To create a new community account please check lt Add new community gt button and enter the account information then check lt Apply gt Max Group Number 4 Web Interface To display the configure SNMP Communities in the web interface 1 Click SNMP Communities 2 Click Add new community 3 Specify the SNMP communities parameters 4 Click Apply 5 If you want to modify or clear the setting then click Reset Figure 2 6 3 The SNMPv1 v2 Communities Security Configuration SNMPv1 v2 Communities to Security Configuration Delete Community UserName Source IP Source Mask SNMPv1 v2 Communities to Security Configuration Delete Community User Name Source IP Source Mask 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Apply Parameter description o Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Community Indicates the community access string to permit access to SNMPv3 agent The allowed string length is 1 t
211. ividual ports ditto setting determine whether RADIUS assigned QoS Class is enabled on that port When unchecked RADIUS server assigned QoS Class is disabled on all ports RADI US Assigned VLAN Enabled 256 RADIUS assigned VLAN provides a means to centrally control the VLAN on which a successfully authenticated supplicant is placed on the switch Incoming traffic will be classified to and switched on the RADIUS assigned VLAN The RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of this feature see RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled below for a detailed description The RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable RADIUS server assigned VLAN functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determine whether RADIUS assigned VLAN is enabled on that port When unchecked RADIUS server assigned VLAN is disabled on all ports e Guest VLAN Enabled A Guest VLAN is a special VLAN typically with limited network access on which 802 1X unaware clients are placed after a network administrator defined timeout The switch follows a set of rules for entering and leaving the Guest VLAN as listed below The Guest VLAN Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable Guest VLAN functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determines whether the port can be moved into Guest VLAN When unchecked the ability to move to the
212. k to enable the use of the TCP UDP Port Number or uncheck to disable By default TCP UDP Port Number is enabled Aggregation Group Configuration e Locality Indicates the aggregation group type This field is only valid for stackable switches Global The group members may reside on different units in the stack The device supports two 8 port global aggregations Local The group members reside on the same unit Each local aggregation may consist of up to 16 members 66 e GroupID Indicates the group ID for the settings contained in the same row Group ID Normal indicates there is no aggregation Only one group ID is valid per port o Port Members Each switch port is listed for each group ID Select a radio button to include a port in an aggregation or clear the radio button to remove the port from the aggregation By default no ports belong to any aggregation group Only full duplex ports can join an aggregation and ports must be in the same speed in each group e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 67 3 3 2 LACP Ports using Link Aggregation Control Protocol according to IEEE 802 3ad specification as their trunking method can choose their unique LACP GroupID to form a logic trunked port The benefit of using LACP is that a port makes an agreement with its peer port before it becomes a ready member of a trunk grou
213. k to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh to refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh clear Remove All You can click them for refresh the ACL configuration or clear them by manual Others remove all to clean up all ACL configurations on the table ARP Parameters The ARP parameters can be configured when Frame Type ARP is selected e ARP RARP Specify the available ARP RARP opcode OP flag for this ACE Any No ARP RARP OP flag is specified OP is don t care ARP Frame must have ARP RARP opcode set to ARP RARP Frame must have ARP RARP opcode set to RARP Other Frame has unknown ARP RARP Opcode flag e Request Reply Specify the available ARP RARP opcode OP flag for this ACE Any No ARP RARP OP flag is specified OP is don t care Request Frame must have ARP Request or RARP Request OP flag set Reply Frame must have ARP Reply or RARP Reply OP flag e Sender IP Filter Specify the sender IP filter for this ACE Any No sender IP filter is specified Sender IP filter is don t care Host Sender IP filter is set to Host Specify the sender IP address in the SIP Address field that appears 57 Network Sender IP filter is set to Network Specify the sender IP address and sender IP mask in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear eo Sender IP Address When Host or Network
214. ked with Drop Precedence Level 2 when the average queue filling level is 100 This value is restricted to 0 100 e Max DP 3 Controls the drop probability for frames marked with Drop Precedence Level 3 when the average queue filling level is 100 This value is restricted to 0 100 eo Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert 198 3 15 EVC This page displays current EVC configurations On this system only Provider Bridge based EVCs are supported 3 15 1 Configuration The section describes how to set EVC Control List Configuration Web Interface To configure the EVC parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration EVC Configuration 2 Click O button to add a new EVC or use the other EVC 3 Choice which NNI ports would you like to set the parameters 4 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button 5 It will revert to previously saved values or click Apply to save changes Figure 3 15 1 The EVC Configuration EVC Control List Configuration EVC ID VID IVID Learning Policer ID NNI Port EVC Configuration NNI Ports 112133145 6 78 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 ololoDlololDlojo O oljololo olo ojojolo lo jojojo lo o ol EVC Parameters EVC ID VID Learnin
215. l refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Clear You can click them for refresh the Port Statistics information by manual Others click Clear to clean up all Port Statistics 41 3 1 4 Detailed Statistics The section describes how to provide detailed traffic statistics for a specific switch port Use the port select box to select which switch port details to display The selected port belongs to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The displayed counters are the totals for receive and transmit the size counters for receive and transmit and the error counters for receive and transmit Web Interface To Display the per port detailed Statistics Overview in the web interface 1 2 Click Configuration Port then Detailed Port Statistics Scroll the Port Index to select which port you want to show the detailed Port statistics overview If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh Click Refresh to refresh the port detailed statistics or clear all information when you click Clear Figure 3 1 4 The Port Detail Statistics Overview Detailed Port Statistics Port 1 Pot Auto refresh C 42 Parameter description e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh to refresh the Port Statistics information automatically Upper left scroll bar To scroll which port to display the Port statistics with Po
216. large and complex with a wide user base and they often involve different operators that must work together to provide end to end services to enterprise customers While enterprise end customer demands continue to increase so do the requirements for service provider Ethernet networks particularly in the areas of availability and mean time to repair MTTR Ethernet OAM addresses these challenges and more thereby directly impacting the competitiveness of the service provider Ethernet has been used as a LAN technology for many years and enterprises have managed these networks effectively Ethernet OAM is a broad topic but this paper will focus on three main areas of Ethernet OAM that are most in need by service providers and are rapidly evolving in the standards bodies Service Layer OAM IEEE 802 lag Connectivity Fault Management Link Layer OAM IEEE 802 3ah OAM and Ethernet Local Management Interface MEF 16 E LMI Each of these different OAM protocols has unique objectives and is complementary to the others IEEE 802 1ag Connectivity Fault Management provides service management 3 20 1 Port Config This chapter allows the user to inspect the current Link OAM port configurations and change them as well It will help user to understand the Port configuration parameter what you need to set when you enable EEE802 3ah OAM function on the switch Web Interface To configure the 802 3ah OAM in the web interface 1 Click Configuration 802 3
217. lay information mode option operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable DHCP relay information mode operation When DHCP relay information mode operation is enabled the agent inserts specific information option 82 into a DHCP message when forwarding to DHCP server and removes it from a DHCP message when transferring to DHCP client It only works when DHCP relay operation mode is enabled Disabled Disable DHCP relay information mode operation e Relay Information Policy Indicates the DHCP relay information option policy When DHCP relay information mode operation is enabled if agent receives a DHCP message that already contains relay agent information it will enforce the policy And it only works under DHCP if relay information operation mode is enabled Possible policies are Replace Replace the original relay information when a DHCP message that already contains it is received Keep Keep the original relay information when a DHCP message that already contains it is received Drop Drop the package when a DHCP message that already contains relay information is received e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 251 4 4 2 Statistics The section describes to show the DHCP Relay Statistics information of the switch The statistics show both of Server and Client packet counters when DHCP Relay mode is enabled Web Interface To configure
218. ld The CDP address TLV can contain multiple addresses but only the first address is shown in the LLDP neighbors table CDP TLV Port ID is mapped to the LLDP Port ID field 121 CDP TLV Version and Platform is mapped to the LLDP System Description field Both the CDP and LLDP support system capabilities but the CDP capabilities cover capabilities that are not part of the LLDP These capabilities are shown as others in the LLDP neighbors table If all ports have CDP awareness disabled the switch forwards CDP frames received from neighbor devices If at least one port has CDP awareness enabled all CDP frames are terminated by the switch Gi Note When CDP awareness on a port is disabled the CDP information isn t removed immediately but gets when the hold time is exceeded Port Descr Optional TLV When checked the port description is included in LLDP information transmitted Sys Name Optional TLV When checked the system name is included in LLDP information transmitted Sys Descr Optional TLV When checked the system description is included in LLDP information transmitted Sys Capa Optional TLV When checked the system capability is included in LLDP information transmitted Mgmt Addr Optional TLV When checked the management address is included in LLDP information transmitted Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to p
219. ll refresh the log automatically e Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt You can click them for refresh the IGMP Group Status by manual others for next up page or entry 103 3 6 MLD Snooping Curiously enough a network node that acts as a source of IPv6 multicast traffic is only an indirect participant in MLD snooping it just provides multicast traffic and MLD doesn t interact with it Note however that in an application like desktop conferencing a network node may act as both a source and an MLD host but MLD interacts with that node only in its role as an MLD host A source node creates multicast traffic by sending packets to a multicast address In IPv6 addresses with the first eight bits set that is FF as the first two characters of the address are multicast addresses and any node that listens to such an address will receive the traffic sent to that address Application software running on the source and destination systems cooperates to determine what multicast address to use Note that this is a function of the application software not of MLD When MLD snooping is enabled on a VLAN the switch acts to minimize unnecessary multicast traffic If the switch receives multicast traffic destined for a given multicast address it forwards that traffic only to ports on the VLAN that have MLD hosts for that address It drops that traffic for ports on the VLAN that have no MLD hosts MLD snooping enabled Lis
220. ll to set all parameters of the MSTI Port configuration Click the Apply to save the setting De Oa U N If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 4 5 The MSTI Port Configuration 85 MSTI Port Configuration Select MSTI MST1 MSTI Port Configuration MSTI Aggregated Ports Configuration Port PathCost Priority Es E MSTI Normal Ports Configuration Path Cost Priority CC cr a ie E TRA TRA MU LEO ea rea ea TA ea ea HU er ea e a 0 ele T 3 lt aa EEE slsl3l3 lis iis is lt lt lt a sp 33 lt i ES 313 lt lt A 18 11 Auto vw 128 w Parameter description e Port The switch port number of the corresponding STP CIST and MSTI port e Path Cost Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favour of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 86 eo Priority Controls the port priority This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost See above e Buttons Apply Click to save
221. lumn shows the list of ports for which you can configure GARP settings There are 2 types configuration settings which can be configured on per port bases Timer Values Application Attribute Type GARP Applicant Timer Values To set the GARP join timer leave timer and leave all timers units is Micro second Three different timers can be configured on this page Join Timer The default value for Join timer is 200ms Leave Timer The range of values for Leave Time is 600 1000ms The default value for Leave Timer is 600ms Leave All Timer The default value for Leave All Timer is 10000ms Application Currently only supported application is GVRP Attribute Type Currently only supported Attribute Type is VLAN GARP Applicant This configuration is used to configure the Applicant state machine behavior for GARP on a 163 particular port locally e normal participant In this mode the Applicant state machine will operate normally in GARP protocol exchanges e non participant In this mode the Applicant state machine will not participate in the protocol operation The default configuration is normal participant e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 164 3 12 2 Statistics The section describes to port statistics of GARP for all switch ports The port statistics relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page
222. lumns which are o A The RADIUS Accounting Server number for which the configuration below applies e Enabled Enable the RADIUS Accounting Server by checking this box e IP Address Hostname The IP address or hostname of the RADIUS Accounting Server IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation O Port The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Accounting Server If the port is set to 0 zero the default port 1813 is used on the RADIUS Accounting Server o Secret The secret up to 29 characters long shared between the RADIUS Accounting Server and the switch stack TACACS Authentication Server Configuration The table has one row for each TACACS Authentication Server and a number of columns which are o A The TACACS Authentication Server number for which the configuration below applies e Enabled Enable the TACACS Authentication Server by checking this box e IP Address Hostname The IP address or hostname of the TACACS Authentication Server IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation o Port 270 The TCP port to use on the TACACS Authentication Server If the port is set to 0 zero the default port 49 is used on the TACACS Authentication Server o Secret The secret up to 29 characters long shared between the TACACS Authentication Server and the switch stack e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previous
223. ly saved values 271 4 6 2 Radius Overview This section shows you an overview of the RADIUS Authentication and Accounting servers status to ensure the function is workable Web Interface To configure a RADIUS Overview Configuration in the web interface 1 Checked Auto refresh Figure 4 6 2 The RADIUS Authentication Server Status Overview RADIUS Authentication Server Status Overview IP Address Status 1 0 0 0 0 1812 Disabled 2 0 0 0 0 1812 Disabled 3 0 0 0 0 1812 Disabled 4 0 0 0 0 1812 Disabled 5 0 0 0 0 1812 Disabled RADIUS Accounting Server Status Overview IP Address Status 1 0 0 0 0 1813 Disabled 2 0 0 0 0 1813 Disabled 3 0 0 0 0 1813 Disabled 4 0 0 0 0 1813 Disabled 5 0 0 0 0 1813 Disabled Parameter description o A The RADIUS server number Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server e IP Address The IP address and UDP port number in lt IP Address gt lt UDP Port gt notation of this server eo State The current state of the server This field takes one of the following values Disabled The server is disabled Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept access attempts Dead X seconds left Access attempts were made to this server
224. mal notation eo DIP Mask When Network is selected for the destination IP filter you can enter a specific DIP mask in dotted decimal notation ICMP Parameters ICMP Type Filter Specify the ICMP filter for this ACE Any No ICMP filter is specified ICMP filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific ICMP filter with this ACE you can enter a specific ICMP value A field for entering an ICMP value appears e ICMP Type Value When Specific is selected for the ICMP filter you can enter a specific ICMP value The allowed range is O to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP value ICMP Code Filter Specify the ICMP code filter for this ACE Any No ICMP code filter is specified ICMP code filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific ICMP code filter with this ACE you can enter a specific ICMP code value A field for entering an ICMP code value appears ICMP Code Value 60 When Specific is selected for the ICMP code filter you can enter a specific ICMP code value The allowed range is O to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP code value TCP UDP Parameters e TCP UDP Source Filter Specify the TCP UDP source filter for this ACE Any No TCP UDP source filter is specified TCP UDP source filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific TCP UDP source filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP sou
225. matically Upper right icon Refresh Clear You can click them for refresh the STP Statistics information or clear by manual 3 5 IGMP Snooping The function is used to establish the multicast groups to forward the multicast packet to the member ports and in nature avoids wasting the bandwidth while 91 IP multicast packets are running over the network This is because a switch that does not support IGMP or IGMP Snooping cannot tell the multicast packet from the broadcast packet so it can only treat them all as the broadcast packet Without IGMP Snooping the multicast packet forwarding function is plain and nothing is different from broadcast packet A switch supported IGMP Snooping with the functions of query report and leave a type of packet exchanged between IP Multicast Router Switch and IP Multicast Host can update the information of the Multicast table when a member port joins or leaves an IP Multicast Destination Address With this function once a switch receives an IP multicast packet it will forward the packet to the members who joined in a specified IP multicast group before The packets will be discarded by the IGMP Snooping if the user transmits multicast packets to the multicast group that had not been built up in advance IGMP mode enables the switch to issue IGMP function that you enable IGMP proxy or snooping on the switch which connects to a router closer to the root of the tree This interface is the upstream in
226. message to all the slaves connected in stack Default value of Global MVRP Mode is Disable e Port The Port coulmn shows the list of ports for which you can configure per port GVRP settings There are three configuration settings which can be configured on per port bases GVRP Mode e GVRP rrole 1 GVRP Mode This configuration is to enable disable GVRP Mode on perticular port locally Disable Select to Disable GVRP mode on this port Enable Select to Enable GVRP mode on this port The default value of configuration is disable 2 GVRP rrole This configuration is used to configure restricted role on an interface e Disable Select to Disable GVRP rrole on this port Enable Select to Enable GVRP rrole on this port The default configuration is disable e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the GVRP Global configuration information by manual e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 167 3 13 2 Statistics The section describes to shows the basic GVRP Port statistics for all switch ports The statistics relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To display GVRP Port statistics in the web interface 1 Click GVRP statistics 2 Scroll which port
227. mitted on the port is different from the Port VLAN ID a VLAN tag with the classified VLAN ID is inserted in the frame Port VLAN ID Configures the VLAN identifier for the port The allowed values are 1 through 4095 The default value is 1 Note The port must be a member of the same VLAN as the Port VLAN ID Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 144 3 10 3 Switch Status The function Switch Status gathers the information of all VLAN status and reports it by the order of Static NAS MVRP MVP Voice VLAN MSTP GVRP Combined Web Interface To Display VLAN membership status in the web interface 1 Click VLAN membership 2 Specify the Staic NAS MVRP MVP Voice VLAN MSTP GVRP 3 Combined 4 Display membership information Figure 3 10 3 The VLAN Membership Status for Static user The ports belong to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header VLAN Membership Status f Combined v Static Start from VLAN 1 with 20 entnes per page NAS GVRP Port Members MVR WLAN ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 M57 E a a MEP EVC VCL Parameter description VLAN USER You can scroll to select one kind VLAN user as below VLAN User module uses services of the VLAN management functionality to configure VLAN memberships and VLAN port configurations such as PVID
228. modules are enabled on the port the Current column will show a dash If the Limit Control user module is not enabled on the port the Limit column will show a dash Indicates the number of currently learned MAC addresses forwarding as well as blocked on the port If no user modules are enabled on the port a dash will be shown Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the Port Security Switch Status information by manual 279 4 7 3 Port Status This section shows the MAC addresses secured by the Port Security module Port Security is a module with no direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from other modules the user modules When a user module has enabled port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward If only one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise Web Interface To configure a Port Security Switch Status Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify the Port which you want to monitor 2 Che
229. n FCC Caution CE mark Warning gt gt accordance with the Instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications To assure continued compliance example use only shielded interface cables when connection to computer or peripheral devices Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the Following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This is a Class B device In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Note Emphasizes important information or calls your attention to related features or instructions WARNING Alerts you to a potential hazard that could cause personal injury CAUTION Alerts you to a potential hazard that could cause loss of data or damage the system or equipment iii Table of Contents Revision FLISLOTY A A sauakdaashanegens eased sbcaghites aaki aE Vill INTRODUCTION icssnss cisscccscsvscescecsescesuesecesecsceccauasos east coaseesscsensseccssoscdseseuracessuacesseavesseaveccsstawosodsastescestesessaceesosces 1 OPERATION OF WEB BASED MANAGEMEN T
230. n This chapter instructs you how to configure and manage the SW24GF4TG through the web user interface With this facility you can easily access and monitor through any one port of the switch all the status of the switch including MIBs status each port activity Spanning tree status port aggregation status multicast traffic VLAN and priority status even illegal access record and so on The default values of the SW24GF4TG are listed in the table below IP Address 192 168 1 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 prye limeriicmecWal 192 168 1 254 Username admin Password After the SW24GF4TG has been finished configuration the it interface you can browse it For instance type_http 192 168 1 1 in the address row in a browser it will show the following screen and ask you inputting username and password in order to login and access authentication The default username is admin and password is empty For the first time to use please enter the default username and password and then click the lt Login gt button The login process now is completed In this login menu you have to input the complete username and password respectively the SW24GF4TG will not give you a shortcut to username automatically This looks inconvenient but safer In the SW24GF4TG it supports a simple user management function allowing only one administrator to configure the system at the same time If there are two or more user
231. n currently Querier Status Show the Querier status is ACTIVE or IDLE Queries Transmitted The number of Transmitted Queries Queries Received The number of Received Queries V1 Reports Received The number of Received V1 Reports V2 Reports Received The number of Received V2 Reports V1 Leaves Received The number of Received V1 Leaves Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the log automatically Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt You can click them for refresh the IGMP Group Status by manual others for next up page or entry 111 3 6 5 Group Information The section describes user could set the MLD Snooping Groups Information The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MLD Group Table Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MLD Group table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MLD Group Table Web Interface To display the MLD Snooping Group information in the web interface 1 Click Configuration MLD Snooping Group Information 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh an entry of the MLD Snooping Group Information 4 Click Clear to clear the MLD Snooping Groups information Fi
232. n is applicable to all endpoint products that act as end user communication appliances supporting IP media Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the previous Generic Endpoint Class and Media Endpoint Class Il classes and are extended to include aspects related to end user devices Example product categories expected to adhere to this class include but are not limited to end user communication appliances such as IP Phones PC based softphones or other communication appliances that directly support the end user Discovery services defined in this class include provision of location identifier including ECS E911 information embedded L2 switch support inventory management e LLDP MED Capabilities LLDP MED Capabilities describes the neighbour unit s LLDP MED capabilities The possible capabilities are LLDP MED capabilities Network Policy Location Identification Extended Power via MDI PSE Extended Power via MDI PD Inventory onan A WN 7 Reserved e Application Type Application Type indicating the primary function of the application s defined for this network policy advertised by an Endpoint or Network Connectivity Device The possible application types are shown below 1 Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhan
233. n network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signalling than for the guest voice media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Guest Voice application policy 5 Softphone Voice for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices such as PCs or laptops This class of endpoints frequently does not support multiple VLANs if at all and are typically configured to use an untagged VLAN or a single tagged data specific VLAN When a network policy is defined for use with an untagged VLAN see Tagged flag below then the L2 priority field is ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance 6 Video Conferencing for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar appliances supporting real time interactive video audio services 7 Streaming Video for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type 8 Video Signalling conditional for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signalling than for the video media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Video Conferencing applicatio
234. n overview of f QoS Ingress Port Policers for all switch ports The Port Policing is useful in constraining traffic flows and marking frames above specific rates Policing is primarily useful for data flows and voice or video flows because voice and video usually maintains a steady rate of traffic Web Interface To display the QoS Port Schedulers in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS Port Policing 2 Evoke which port need to enable the QoS Ingress Port Policers and type the Rate limit condition Scroll to select the Rate limit Unit with kbps Mbps fps and kfps 4 Click Apply to save the configuration Figure 3 14 2 The QoS Ingress Port Policers Configuration QoS Ingress Port Policers Port Mode Rate Unit Flow Control oo 1 O 500 kbps v O 2 oO 500 kbps v O 3 SCA 500 kbps v O 4 O 500 kbps v O 5 E 500 kbps v O 6 O 50 kbps v O 7 Bo 500 kbps v O al O 500 kbps O 9 O 500 kbps vw O O 500 ktrs_v O a 500 kbps x O 2 O 500 kbps v O 3 O 500 kbps v O 1A E am khe e Fi Parameter description Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure the schedulers Enabled To evoke which Port you need to enable the QoS Ingress Port Policers function Rate To set the Rate limit value for th
235. n policy e Tag Tag indicating whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an untagged VLAN Untagged indicates that the device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 In this case both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority fields are ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance Tagged indicates that the device is using the IEEE 802 1Q tagged frame format and that both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority values are being used as well as the DSCP value The tagged format includes an additional field known as the tag header The tagged frame format also includes priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 e VLAN ID VLAN identifier VID for the port as defined in IEEE 802 1Q 2003 o L2 Priority L2 Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type L2 Priority may specify one of eight priority levels 0 through 7 as defined by IEEE 802 1D 2004 A value of O represents use of the default priority as defined in IEEE 802 1D 2004 Oo DSCP DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behaviour for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 DSCP may contain one of 64 code point values 0 through 63 A value of 0 represents use of the default DSCP value as defined in RFC 2475 e Adding a new policy Click to add a new policy Specify the Application type Tag VLAN ID L2 Priority
236. name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Group Name A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 28 2 6 6 Views The function is used to configure SNMPv3 view The Entry index key are OID Subtree and View Name To create a new view account please check lt Add new view gt button and enter the view information then check lt Save gt Max Group Number 28 Configure SNMPv3 view table on this page The entry index keys are View Name and OID Subtree Web Interface 1 Click SNMP Views 2 Click Add new View 3 Specify the SNMP View parameters 4 Click Apply 5 If you want to modify or clear the setting then click Reset Figure 2 6 6 The SNMP Views Configuration SNMPv3 Views Configuration Delete ViewName View Type OID Subtree SNMPv3 Views Configuration Delete ViewName View Type OID Subtree Deve J ESO Apply Parameter description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e View Name A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 eo View Type Indicates the view type that this
237. ndicates the rate limiter number of the ACE The allowed range is 1 to 16 When Disabled is displayed the rate limiter operation is disabled e Port Copy 63 Indicates the port copy operation of the ACE Frames matching the ACE are copied to the port number The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number When Disabled is displayed the port copy operation is disabled Mirror Specify the mirror operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are mirrored Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled CPU Forward packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU CPU Once Forward first packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU Counter The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame Conflict Indicates the hardware status of the specific ACE The specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh to refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the ACL status information by manual 64 3 3 Aggregation The Aggregation is used to configure the settings of Link Aggregation You can bundle more than one port with the same speed full duplex and the same MAC to be a single logical port thus the logical port aggregates the bandwidth of these ports This means you can apply your current Ethernet equipment s
238. need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 24 The PTP Configuration PTP External Clock Mode One_PPS_Mode External Enable VCXO Enable Clock Frequency PTP Clock Configuration Port List Delete Clock Instance Device Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 No Clock Instances Present Garros 20 3 PTP Clock Configuration Port List Delete Clock Instance Device Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 s 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 No Clock Instances Present Delete Clock Instance Device Type 2 Step Flag Clock Identity One Way Protocol VLAN Tag Enable VID PCP Delete o OrkBomd v Tre v 0040c74H1e9e0740 Fase v Beet v O 0 ox Parameter description e One_pps_mode This Selection box will allow you to select the One_pps_mode configuration The following values are possible 232 1 Output Enable the 1 pps clock output 2 Input Enable the 1 pps clock input 3 Disable Disable the 1 pps clock in out put e External Enable This Selection box will allow you to configure the External Clock output The following values are possible 1 True Enable the external clock output 2 False Disable the external clock output e VCXO_ Enable This Selection box will allow you to configure the External
239. ng all other devices connected to the extended network The current version of the Internet protocol is IPv4 which has 32 bits Internet Protocol addresses allowing for in excess of four billion unique addresses This number is reduced drastically by the practice of webmasters taking addresses in large blocks the bulk of which remain unused There is a rather substantial movement to adopt a new version of the Internet Protocol Pv6 which would have 128 bits Internet Protocol addresses This number can be represented roughly by a three with thirty nine zeroes after it However IPv4 is still the protocol of choice for most of the Internet 2 4 1 IPV4 The IPv4 address for the switch could be obtained via DHCP Server for VLAN 1 To manually configure an address you need to change the switch s default settings to values that are compatible with your network You may also need to a establish a default gateway between the switch and management stations that exist on another network segment Configure the switch managed IP information on this page The Configured column is used to view or change the IP configuration The Current column is used to show the active IP configuration Web Interface To configure an IP address in the web interface 1 Click System IP Configuration 2 Specify the Pv4 settings and enable DNS proxy service if required 3 Click Apply Figure2 4 1 The IP configuration IP Configuration Configure
240. ns The maximum number of ACEs is 256 on each switch Web Interface To display the ACL status in the web interface Click Configuration ACL then ACL status 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the ACL Status Figure 3 2 4 The ACL Rate Limiter Configuration ACL Status Combined y Auto refresh C User Ingress Port Frame Type Action Rate Limiter Port Redirect CPU CPU Once Counter Conflict Reserved All EType Permit Disabled Disabled No No 0 No Reserved All EType Permit Disabled Disabled No No 0 No Parameter description o User Indicates the ACL user e Ingress Port Indicates the ingress port of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any ingress port Policy The ACE will match ingress ports with a specific policy Port The ACE will match a specific ingress port eo Frame Type Indicates the frame type of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any frame type EType The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames Note that an Ethernet Type based ACE will not get matched by IP and ARP frames ARP The ACE will match ARP RARP frames Pv4 The ACE will match all Pv4 frames e Action Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped Rate Limiter I
241. nterface 1 Click MAC based VLAN Status 2 Specify the Static NAS Combined 3 Display MAC based information Figure 3 10 6 2 The MAC based VLAN Membership Status for User Static MAC based VLAN Membership Configuration for User Static Static iv Port Members No data exists for the user Parameter description MAC Address Indicates the MAC address e VLANID Indicates the VLAN ID Port Members Port members of the MAC based VLAN entry e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the MAC based VLAN Memebership information by manual 153 3 10 7 Protocol based VLAN This section describe Protocol based VLAN The Switch support Protocol include Ethernet LLC SNAP Protocol LLC The Logical Link Control LLC data communication protocol layer is the upper sub layer of the Data Link Layer which is itself layer 2 just above the Physical Layer in the seven layer OSI reference model It provides multiplexing mechanisms that make it possible for several network protocols IP IPX Decnet and Appletalk to coexist within a multipoint network and to be transported over the same network media and can also provide flow control and automatic repeat request ARQ error management mechanisms SNAP The Subnetwork Access Protocol SNAP is a mechanism for multiplexing on networks using IEEE
242. o 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The community string will be treated as security name and map a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community string o UserName The UserName access string to permit access to SNMPv3 agent The length of UserName string is restricted to 1 32 o Source IP Indicates the SNMP access source address A particular range of source addresses can be used to restrict source subnet when combined with source mask e Source Mask Indicates the SNMP access source address mask e Buttons Apply Click to apply changes 25 2 6 4 Users The function is used to configure SNMPv3 user The Entry index key is UserName To create a new UserName account please check lt Add new user gt button and enter the user information then check lt Save gt Max Group Number 10 Web Interface To display the configure SNMP Users in the web interface 1 Click SNMP Users 2 Specify the Privilege parameter 3 Click Apply Figure 2 6 4 The SNMP Users Configuration SNMPv3 Users Configuration a User Security Authentication Authentication Privacy Privacy Name Level Protocol Password Protocol Password SNMPv3 Users Configuration Delete User Security Authentication Authentication Privacy Privacy Name Level Protocol Password Protocol Password Amb Pi y MDS y WA DES iy Apply Parameter description e Delete Check to dele
243. o Browse Click the Browse button to search the Configuration URL and filename e Upload Click the Upload button then the switch will start to upload the configuration from configuration stored location PC or Server 5 5 Diagmostics This section provides a set of basic system diagnosis It let users know that whether the system is health or needs to be fixed The basic system check includes ICMP Ping ICMPv6 and VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics 5 5 1 Ping This section allows you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IPv6 connectivity issues Web Interface To configure an ICMP PING Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify ICMP PING IP Address 2 Specify ICMP PING Size 3 Click Start Figure 5 5 1 The I CMP Ping ICMP Ping Ping Interval 1 Parameter description e IP Address The destination IP Address e Ping Length The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 2bytes to 1452 bytes e Ping Count The count of the ICMP packet Values range from 1 time to 60 times 296 e Ping Interval The interval of the ICMP packet Values range from Osecond to 30 seconds 297 5 5 2 Ping6 This section allows you to issue ICMPv6 PING packets to troubleshoot IPv6 connectivity issues Web Interface To configure an ICMPv6 PING Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify ICMPv6 PING IP Address 2 Specify ICMPv6 PING Size 3 Click Start Figure 5 5 2 The I CMPv6 Ping IC
244. o any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 209 3 18 Trap Event Severity The function is used to set an Alarm trap and get the Event log The Trap Events Configuration function is used to enable the switch to send out the trap information while pre defined trap events occurred Web Interface To configure the Trap Event Severity Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Trap Event Severity Configuration Scroll to select the Group name and Severity Level Click the Apply to save the setting If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button oY e we wN It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 18 The Trap Event Severity Configuration Trap Event Severity Configuration eye iF K3 ES AN 5 A To v To v Waning v EE K3 KI ES is KIK l Apply 210 Parameter description e Group Name The field describes the Trap Event definition Severity Level To scroll to select the event type with Emerg Alert Crit Error Warming Notice Info and Debug e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 211 3 19 SMTP Configuration The function is used to set an Alarm trap when the switch alarm then you could set the SMTP server to send you the alarm mail Web Interface To configure the SMTP Configuration in the web interface 1 2 3 4 5
245. o the Static ARP Inspection table Specify the Port VLAN ID MAC address and IP address for the new entry Click Save e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 244 4 2 3 Dynamic Table The section describes to configure the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table parameters of the switch The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table contains up to 1024 entries and is sorted first by port then by VLAN ID then by MAC address and then by IP address Web Interface To configure a Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify the Start from port VLAN ID MAC Address IP Address and entries per page 2 Checked Auto refresh Figure 4 2 3 The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Auto refresh Start from Pot1 y VLAN 1 MAC address 00 00 00 00 00 00 and IP address 0 0 0 0 per page Port VLAN ID MAC Address IP Address No more entries Parameter description eo Port Switch Port Number for which the entries are displayed e VLANID VLAN ID in which the ARP traffic is permitted e MAC Address User MAC address of the entry e IP Address User IP address of the entry e Auto refresh Refiesh k lt gt gt with 20 entries To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh lt lt
246. o vi 02m Non Edge v Y O O a Auto 4 a a ojo O CI to M mE O Awo v a a ojo O a a ojo O a a O C O a 5 a ojc O E Awo vi 128 Non Edge v Y C C C Auto 4 Non Edge v Y aa C m p 120 las lan RA W j j j Anta Parameter description o Port The switch port number of the logical STP port STP Enabled 82 Controls whether STP is enabled on this switch port e Path Cost Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favour of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 eo Priority Controls the port priority This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost See above e operEdge state flag Operational flag describing whether the port is connecting directly to edge devices No Bridges attached Transition to the forwarding state is faster for edge ports having operEdge true than for other ports The value of this flag is based on AdminEdge and AutoEdge fields This flag is displayed as Edge in Monitor gt Spanning Tree gt STP Detailed Bridge Status e AdminEdge Controls whether the operEdge flag should start as set or cleared The
247. od for enabling switches to advertise themselves to adjacent devices and to learn about adjacent LLDP devices The Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP is a vendor neutral Link Layer protocol in the Internet Protocol Suite used by network devices for advertising their identity capabilities and neighbors on a IEEE 802 local area network principally wired Ethernet The protocol is formally referred to by the IEEE as Station and Media Access Control Connectivity Discovery specified in standards document IEEE 802 1AB 3 8 1 LLDP Configuration You can per port to do the LLDP configuration and the detail parameters the settings will take effect immediately This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current LLDP port settings Web Interface To configure LLDP Click LLDP configuration Modify LLDP timing parameters Set the required mode for transmitting or receiving LLDP messages Specify the information to include in the TLV field of advertised messages Click Apply Pras ee Figure 3 8 1 The LLDP Configuration LLDP Configuration LLDP Parameters Tx Interval 30 seconds Tx Hold 4 times Tx Delay 2 seconds Tx Reinit 2 seconds Optional TLVs Mode CDP aware Port Descr Sys Name Sys Descr Sys Capa Mgmt Addr gt v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v 10 Disabled v 11 Disabled vw 12
248. ode Dista Y Port Mode Configuration 242 Parameter description e Mode of ARP Inspection Configuration Enable the Global ARP Inspection or disable the Global ARP Inspection e Port Mode Configuration Specify ARP Inspection is enabled on which ports Only when both Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled ARP Inspection is enabled on this given port e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 243 4 2 2 Static Table The section describes to configure the Static ARP Inspection Table parameters of the switch You could use the Static ARP Inspection Table configure to manage the ARP entries Web Interface To configure a Static ARP Inspection Table Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Add new entry 2 Specify the Port VLAN ID IP Address and MAC address in the entry 3 Click Apply Figure 4 2 2 The Static ARP Inspection Table Static ARP Inspection Table VLAN ID MAC Address IP Address Delete Port Parameter description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save eo Port The logical port for the settings e VLANID The vlan id for the settings e MAC Address Allowed Source MAC address in ARP request packets e IP Address Allowed Source IP address in ARP request packets e Adding new entry Click to add a new entry t
249. oes not involve communication between the switch and the client and therefore doesn t imply that a client is still present on a port see Aging Period below Reauthentication Period Determines the period in seconds after which a connected client must be reauthenticated This is only active if the Reauthentication Enabled checkbox is checked Valid values are in the range 1 to 3600 seconds EAPOL Timeout Determines the time for retransmission of Request Identity EAPOL frames Valid values are in the range 1 to 255 seconds This has no effect for MAC based ports Aging Period This setting applies to the following modes i e modes using the Port Security functionality to secure MAC addresses e Single 802 1X Multi 802 1X MAC Based Auth When the NAS module uses the Port Security module to secure MAC addresses the Port Security module needs to check for activity on the MAC address in question at regular intervals and free resources if no activity is seen within a given period of time This parameter controls exactly this period and can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds If reauthentication is enabled and the port is in an 802 1X based mode this is not so critical since supplicants that are no longer attached to the port will get removed upon the next reauthentication which will fail But if reauthentication is not enabled the only way to free resources is by aging the entries For ports in MAC based Au
250. ooding IGMP SSM Range SSM Source Specific Multicast Range allows the SSM aware hosts and routers run the SSM service model for the groups in the address range Format IP address sub mask Proxy Enabled Enable IGMP Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary join and leave messages to the router side Port It shows the physical Port index of switch Router Port Specify which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier If an aggregation member port is selected as a router port the whole aggregation will act as a router port Fast Leave Enable the fast leave on the port Throttling Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can 93 belong e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 94 3 5 2 VLAN Configuration The section describes the VLAN configuration setting process integrated with IGMP Snooping function For Each setting page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the VLAN Table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table The VLAN input fields allow the user to select the startin
251. ority is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 1Q frame It is also known as PCP 315 VLAN Virtual LAN A method to restrict communication between switch ports VLANs can be used for the following applications VLAN unaware switching This is the default configuration All ports are VLAN unaware with Port VLAN ID 1 and members of VLAN 1 This means that MAC addresses are learned in VLAN 1 and the switch does not remove or insert VLAN tags VLAN aware switching This is based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard All ports are VLAN aware Ports connected to VLAN aware switches are members of multiple VLANs and transmit tagged frames Other ports are members of one VLAN set up with this Port VLAN ID and transmit untagged frames Provider switching This is also known as Q in Q switching Ports connected to subscribers are VLAN unaware members of one VLAN and set up with this unique Port VLAN ID Ports connected to the service provider are VLAN aware members of multiple VLANs and set up to tag all frames Untagged frames received on a subscriber port are forwarded to the provider port with a single VLAN tag Tagged frames received ona subscriber port are forwarded to the provider port with a double VLAN tag VLAN ID VLAN ID is a 12 bit field specifying the VLAN to which the frame belongs Voice VLAN Voice VLAN is VLAN configured specially for voice traffic By adding the ports with voice devices attached to voice VLAN we can
252. ort Configuration of Limit Control in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Mode of Port Configuration 2 Specify the maximum number of MAC addresses in the Limit of Port Configuration Set Action Trap Shutdown Trap amp Shutdown 4 Click Apply Figure 4 7 1 The Port Security Limit Control Configuration Port Security Limit Control Configuration System Configuration Mode Disabled Aging Enabled Aging Period Meo seconds Port Configuration Port 1 Disabled 2 Disabled s 4 Disabled 5 i Disabled 6 Disabled uf Disabled s 10 i Disabled 11 i Disabled 12 Disabled vw 1 Disabled 13 Disabled Disabled EENE n 142 ESAADIAA 275 Parameter description System Configuration eo Mode Indicates if Limit Control is globally enabled or disabled on the switch stack If globally disabled other modules may still use the underlying functionality but limit checks and corresponding actions are disabled e Aging Enabled If checked secured MAC addresses are subject to aging as discussed under Aging Period e Aging Period If Aging Enabled is checked then the aging period is controlled with this input If other modules are using the underlying port security for securing MAC addresses they may have other requirements to the aging period The underlying po
253. orts with the same key can aggregate together Aggr ID The Aggregation ID assigned to this aggregation group IDs 1 and 2 are GLAGs while IDs 3 14 are LLAGs Partner System ID The partner s System ID MAC address Partner Port The partner s port number connected to this port Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh to refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the LACP port status information by manual 72 3 3 2 4 Port Statistics This section describes that when you complete to set LACP function on the switch then it provides a Port Statistics overview for all LACP instances Web Interface To display the LACP Port status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration LACP Port Statistics 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the LACP Statistics Figure 3 3 2 4 The LACP Statistics LACP Statistics Parameter description eo Port The switch port number e LACP Received 73 Shows how many LACP frames have been received at each port LACP Transmitted Shows how many LACP frames have been sent from each port Discarded Shows how many unknown or illegal LACP frames have been discarded at each port Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh to refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Clear You can click them for refresh the LACP port
254. ou to configure the LLDP MED This function applies to VolP devices which support LLDP MED Web Interface To configure LLDP MED 1 Click LLDP MED Configuration Modify Fast start repeat count parameter default is 4 Modify Coordinates Location parameters Fill Civic Address Location parameters Add new policy Click Save will show following Policy Port Configuration Select Policy ID for each port Click Apply A SY es ee O Figure 3 8 3 The LLDP MED Configuration 125 LLDPMED Configuration Fast Start Repeat Count Fast start repeat count a Coordinates Location Noth v Longitude JO ll Est v Altitude 0 Mes vi VaR a wass v degrees 0 degrees Latitude Civic Address Location Country code State County ener Block al A Neighbourhood Street Pais ela Trailing street suffix irection Street suffix House no House no suffix Additional 1 tel location info a pace Zip code Building Apartment Floor Room no Place type aia P O Box Additional code name Emergency Call Service Emergency Call Service Poliev Port Confiauration Policies Delete Policy ID Application Type Tag VLANID L2
255. ows this four octet field indicates the number of frame errors in the period Total Frame Period Errors The field shows this eight octet field indicates the sum of frame errors that have been detected since the OAM sub layer was reset Total Frame Period Error Events The field shows this four octet field indicates the number of Errored Frame Period Event TLVs that have been generated since the OAM sub layer was reset Symbol Period Error Event Timestamp The field shows this two octet field indicates the time reference when the event was generated in terms of 100 ms intervals Symbol Period Error Event Window The field shows this eight octet field indicates the number of symbols in the period Symbol Period Error Event Threshold The field shows this eight octet field indicates the number of errored symbols in the period is required to be equal to or greater than in order for the event to be generated Symbol Period Errors The field shows this eight octet field indicates the number of symbol errors in the period Symbol frame Period Errors The field shows this eight octet field indicates the sum of symbol errors since the OAM sub layer was reset Event Seconds Summary Time Stamp The field shows this two octet field indicates the time reference when the event was generated in terms of 100 ms intervals encoded as a 16 bit unsigned integer Event Seconds Summary Window The field shows this two octet field indica
256. ows you an detailed statistics of the RADIUS Authentication and Accounting servers The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4668 RADIUS Authentication Client MIB Web Interface To configure a RADIUS Details Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify Port which want to check 2 Checked Auto refresh Figure 4 6 3 The RADIUS Authentication Statistics Server RADIUS Authentication Statistics Server 1 v RADIUS Accounting Statistics for Server 1 Parameter description e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Clear You can click them for refresh the RADIUS Statistics information by manual Others you can Click the clear to clean up all entries 274 4 7 Port Security This section shows you to configure the Port Security settings of the Switch You can use the Port Security feature to restrict input to an interface by limiting and identifying MAC addresses 4 7 1 Limit Control This section shows you to configure the Port Security settings of the Switch You can use the Port Security feature to restrict input to an interface by limiting and identifying MAC addresses Web Interface To configure a System Configuration of Limit Control in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Mode of System Configuration 2 Checked Aging Enabled 3 Set Aging Period Default is 3600 seconds To configure a P
257. p also called aggregator LACP is safer than the other trunking method static trunk 3 3 2 1 Configuration This page allows the user to inspect the current LACP port configurations and possibly change them as well An LACP trunk group with more than one ready member ports is a real trunked group An LACP trunk group with only one or less than one ready member ports is not a real trunked group Web Interface To configure the Trunk Aggregation LACP parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration LACP Configuration 2 Evoke to enable or disable the LACP on the port of the switch Scroll the Key parameter with Auto or Specific Default is Auto Scroll the Role with Active or Passive Default is Active Click the Apply to save the setting If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 3 2 1 The LACP Port Configuration 68 LACP Port Configuration Hun ellos ayn A ell gt I gt l gt WHA Wi Es lle Mes ie ie fis ifi a A Eee lt i MES ES CS fs fs fl sisi ES ES fis i sis es Piel el ele ee el el el ao fl o gt gt a Wo bd bb lll I lt lt i MES Es Hs Es Es iis fis NES is fie ie 5 al Parameter description Port The switch port number LACP Enabled Controls whether LACP is enabled on this switch port LACP will form an aggregation when 2 or more ports are connected to the same partner LACP
258. port that you need to evoke which port you wants to enable the function On enabling the Link Monitor support the DTE supports event notification that permits the inclusion of diagnostic information e MIB Retrieval Support 215 To evoke which port you want to enable the MIB Retrieval support function On enabling the MIB retrieval support the DTE supports polling of various Link OAM based MIB variables contents e Loopback Operation To evoke to enable or disable the Loopback Operation function on the Port If the Loopback support is enabled enabling this field will start a loopback operation for the port e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 216 3 20 2 Event Config This chapter allows the user to inspect the current Link OAM Event configurations and change them as well It allows you to set what kind event to trigger 802 3ah OAM monitor and management function Web Interface To configure the Link event configuration in the web interface 1 noe w N Click Configuration 802 3ah OAM then Event config Evoke auto refresh to update the Link Event data Set all parameters on Link event field Click the Apply to save the setting If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 20 2 The Link Event Configuration Link Event Configuration fo
259. pper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the Port Security Port Status information by manual 280 4 8 Access Management This section shows you to configure access management table of the Switch including HTTP HTTPS SNMP and TELNET SSH You can manage the Switch over an Ethernet LAN or over the Internet 4 8 1 Configuration This section shows you how to configure access management table of the Switch The maximum entry number is 16 If the application s type match any one of the access management entries it will allow access to the switch Web Interface To configure a Access Management Configuration in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Mode of Access Management Configuration 2 Click Add new entry 3 Specify the Start IP Address End IP Address 4 Checked Access Managemnet method HTTP HTTPS SNMP and TELNET SSH in the entry 5 Click Apply Figure 4 8 1 The Access Management Configuration Access Management Configuration Mode Delete Start IP Address End IP Address HTTP HTTPS SNMP TELNET SSH Delete Start IP Address E End IP Address HTTP HTTPS SNMP TELNETISSH 0000 0000 O O O Apply Parameter description e Mode Indicates the access management mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable access management mode operation Disabled Disable access management mode operation e Delete Check to
260. quire group address allocation within the network only within each source host Different applications running on the same source host must use different SSM groups Different applications running on different source hosts can arbitrarily reuse SSM group addresses without causing any excess traffic on the network Addresses in the range 232 0 0 0 8 232 0 0 0 to 232 255 255 255 are reserved for SSM by IANA In the switch you can configure SSM for arbitrary IP multicast addresses also The IGMP SFM Source Filtered Multicast Information Table also contains the SSM Source Specific Multicast information This table is sorted first by VLAN ID then by group and then by Port Different source addresses belong to the same group are treated as single entry Web Interface To display the IGMPv3 Pv4 SSM Information in the web interface 1 Click Configuration IGMP Snooping Pv4 SSM Information 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh Click Refresh to refresh a entry of the GMPv3 Pv4 SSM Information Click lt lt or gt gt to move to previous or next entry Figure 3 5 6 The I GMP SFM Information IGMP SFM Information Start from VLAN and Group 224 0 0 0 f with 20 entries per page VLAN ID Group Port Mode Source Address Type No more entries Parameter description Navigating the IGMPv3 Information Table Each page shows up to 9
261. r Default Time zone 8 Hrs Web Interface To configure Time in the web interface 1 Click SYSTEM NTP 2 Specify the Time parameter in manual parameters 3 Click Apply Figure 2 2 2 The NTP configuration NTP Configuration Server 1 Server 2 Server 3 Server 4 Server 5 Apply Parameter description Server lto 5 Provide the NTP IPv4 or IPv6 address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once lt can also represent a legally valid Pv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Buttons These buttons are displayed on the NTP page Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 11 2 3 Account In this function only administrator can create modify or delete the username and password Administrator can modify other guest identities password without confirming the password but it is necessary to modify the administrator equivalent identity Guest equivalent identity can modify his password only Please note that you must confirm administrator guest identity in the field of Authorization in advance before configuring the usern
262. r Port 1 Pori v Auto refresh O Event Name Error Window Error Threshold Error Frame Event Symbol Period Error Event Seconds Summary Event Apply Parameter description o Port Members The switch port number and index for port configuration IEEE 802 3ah OAM event configuration 0 Event Name Name of the Link Event which is being configured on the switch and it will be monitored by switch Error Frame Event The Errored Frame Event counts the number of errored frames detected during the specified period The period is specified by a time interval Window in order of 100msec This event is generated if the errored frame count is equal to or greater than the specified threshold for that period Period Threshold Errored frames are frames that had transmission errors as detected at the Media Access Control sub layer Event Seconds Summary The Errored Frame Seconds Summary Event TLV counts the number of errored frame seconds that occurred during the specified period The period is specified by a time interval This event is generated if the number of errored frame seconds is equal to or greater than the specified threshold for that period An errored frame second is a one second interval wherein at least one frame error was detected Errored frames are frames that had transmission errors as detected at the Media Access Control sub layer Symbol Period Error Event The Errored Symbol Period Event
263. r commands through the Telnet program just as if they were entering commands directly on the server console TFTP TFTP is an acronym for Trivial File Transfer Protocol It is transfer protocol that uses the User Datagram Protocol UDP and provides file writing and reading but it does not 314 UDP provide directory service and security features UDP is an acronym for User Datagram Protocol It is a communications protocol that uses the Internet Protocol IP to exchange the messages between computers UDP is an alternative to the Transmission Control Protocol TCP that uses the Internet Protocol IP Unlike TCP UDP does not provide the service of dividing a message into packet datagrams and UDP doesn t provide reassembling and sequencing of the packets This means that the application program that uses UDP must be able to make sure that the entire message has arrived and is in the right order Network applications that want to save processing time because they have very small data units to exchange may prefer UDP to TCP UDP provides two services not provided by the IP layer It provides port numbers to help distinguish different user requests and optionally a checksum capability to verify that the data arrived intact Common network applications that use UDP include the Domain Name System DNS streaming media applications such as IPTV Voice over IP VoIP and Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP User Priority User Pri
264. r every entry which consists of a combination of alphabets a z or A Z and integers 0 9 Gi NoTE Special character and underscore _ are not allowed e Adding a New Group to VLAN mapping entry Click to add a new entry in mapping table An empty row is added to the table Frame Type Value and the Group Name can be configured as needed The button can be used to undo the addition of new entry e Buttons Apply Click to save changes 155 Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the Protocol Group Mapping information by manual 156 3 10 7 2 Group to VLAN This section allows you to map an already configured Group Name to a VLAN for the selected stack switch unit switch Web Interface To Display Group Name to VLAN mapping table configured in the web interface 1 2 3 Click Group Name VLAN configuration and add new entry Specify the Group Name and VLAN ID Click Apply Figure 3 12 7 2 The Group Name of VLAN Mapping Table Group Name to VLAN mapping Table Auto refres Port Members Delete Group Name VLAN ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 No Group entries Group Name to VLAN mapping Table Auto refresh O Port Members Delete Group Name VLANID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
265. rce value A field for entering a TCP UDP source value appears Range If you want to filter a specific TCP UDP source range filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP source range value A field for entering a TCP UDP source value appears e TCP UDP Source No When Specific is selected for the TCP UDP source filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP source value The allowed range is O to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP source value e TCP UDP Source Range When Range is selected for the TCP UDP source filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP source range value The allowed range is O to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP source value e TCP UDP Destination Filter Specify the TCP UDP destination filter for this ACE Any No TCP UDP destination filter is specified TCP UDP destination filter status is don t care Specific f you want to filter a specific TCP UDP destination filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination value A field for entering a TCP UDP destination value appears Range If you want to filter a specific range TCP UDP destination filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination range value A field for entering a TCP UDP destination value appears e TCP UDP Destination Number When Specific is selected for the TCP UDP destination filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination value The allowed range i
266. red as Edge will transmit and receive BPDUs Edge Port BPDU Guard Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will disable itself upon reception of a BPDU The port will enter the error disabled state and will be removed from the active topology Port Error Recovery Control whether a port in the error disabled state automatically will be enabled after a certain time If recovery is not enabled ports have to be disabled and re enabled for normal STP operation The condition is also cleared by a system reboot Port Error Recovery Timeout The time to pass before a port in the error disabled state can be enabled Valid values are between 30 and 86400 seconds 24 hours Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 77 2 4 2 MSTI Mapping When you implement an Spanning Tree protocol on the switch that the bridge instance The CIST is not available for explicit mapping as it will receive the VLANs not explicitly mapped Due to the reason that you need to set the list of VLANs mapped to the MSTI The VLANs must be separated with comma and or space A VLAN can only be mapped to one MSTI An unused MSTI should just be left empty l e not having any VLANs mapped to it This section describes it allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority configurations and possibly change them as well Web Interface To conf
267. regular HTTP application layering HTTPS uses port 443 instead of HTTP port 80 in its interactions with the lower layer TCP IP SSL uses a 40 bit key size for the RC4 stream encryption algorithm which is considered an adequate degree of encryption for commercial exchange ICMP is an acronym for Internet Control Message Protocol It is a protocol that generated the error response diagnostic or routing purposes ICMP messages generally contain information about routing difficulties or simple exchanges such as time stamp or echo transactions For example the PING command uses ICMP to test an Internet connection 305 IEEE 802 1X IGMP IEEE 802 1X is an IEEE standard for port based Network Access Control It provides authentication to devices attached to a LAN port establishing a point to point connection or preventing access from that port if authentication fails With 802 1X access to all switch ports can be centrally controlled from a server which means that authorized users can use the same credentials for authentication from any point within the network IGMP is an acronym for Internet Group Management Protocol It is a communications protocol used to manage the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups IGMP is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish multicast group memberships It is an integral part of the IP multicast specification like ICMP for unicast connections IGMP can be used for online video and
268. reviously saved values 122 3 8 2 LLDP Neighbours This page provides a status overview for all LLDP neighbours The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbour is detected The columns hold the following information Web Interface To show LLDP neighbours 1 Click LLDP Neighbours 2 Click Refresh for manual update web screen 3 Click Auto refresh for auto update web screen Figure 3 8 2 The LLDP Neighbours information LLDP Neighbour Information Auto refresh C Local Chassis Remote Port System Port System System Management Port ID ID Name Description Capabilities Description Address No LLDP neighbour information found Note If your network without any device supports LLDP then the table will show No LLDP neighbour information found Parameter description Local Port The port on which the LLDP frame was received e Chassis ID The Chassis ID is the identification of the neighbour s LLDP frames e Remote PortID The Remote Port ID is the identification of the neighbour port eo System Name System Name is the name advertised by the neighbour unit e Port Description Port Description is the port description advertised by the neighbour unit System Capabilities System Capabilities describes the neighbour unit s capabilities The possible capabilities are 1 Other Repeater Bridge WLAN Access Point Router Telephone DOCSIS ca
269. riPHY Cable Diagnostics e Cable Status Port Port number Pair The status of the cable pair Length The length in meters of the cable pair 299 ACE ACL AES APS A Glossary of Web based Management ACE is an acronym for Access Control Entry It describes access permission associated with a particular ACE ID There are three ACE frame types Ethernet Type ARP and IPv4 and two ACE actions permit and deny The ACE also contains many detailed different parameter options that are available for individual application ACL is an acronym for Access Control List It is the list table of ACEs containing access control entries that specify individual users or groups permitted or denied to specific traffic objects such as a process or a program Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its ACL The privileges determine whether there are specific traffic object access rights ACL implementations can be quite complex for example when the ACEs are prioritized for the various situation In networking the ACL refers to a list of service ports or network services that are available on a host or server each with a list of hosts or servers permitted or denied to use the service ACL can generally be configured to control inbound traffic and in this context they are similar to firewalls There are 3 web pages associated with the manual ACL configuration ACL Access Control List The web page shows the ACEs
270. ring will have only one ring port W port is configured as 0 for interconnected sub ring 0 in this field indicates that no west port is associated with this instance Port O SF MEP E SF MEP The field you need to assign the East Signal Fail reporting MEP Port 1 SF MEP W SF MEP 230 The West Signal Fail reporting MEP As only one SF MEP is associated with interconnected sub ring without virtual channel it is configured as 0 for such ring instances 0 in this field indicates that no west SF MEP is associated with this instance Port O APS MEP E APS MEP The field you need to assign the East APS PDU handling MEP Port 1 APS MEP W APS MEP The West APS PDU handling MEP As only one APS MEP is associated with interconnected sub ring without virtual channel it is configured as 0 for such ring instances 0 in this field indicates that no west APS MEP is associated with this instance Ring Type To scroll to select the type of Protection ring It can be either major ring or sub ring Interconnected Node Interconnected Node indicates that the ring instance is interconnected Click on the checkbox to configure this Yes indicates it is an interconnected node for this instance No indicates that the configured instance is not interconnected Virtual Channel Sub rings can either have virtual channel or not on the interconnected node This is configured using Virtual Channel checkbox Yes indicates it is a sub
271. row Port Type Port can be one of the following types Unaware Customer port C port Service port S port Custom Service port S custom port If Port Type is Unaware all frames are classified to the Port VLAN ID and tags are not removed Ingress Filtering Enable ingress filtering on a port by checking the box This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If ingress filtering is enabled and the ingress port is not a member of the classified VLAN of the frame the frame is discarded By default ingress filtering is disabled no checkmark Frame Type Determines whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged untagged frames This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If the port only accepts tagged frames untagged frames received on the port are discarded By default the field is set to All Port VLAN Mode Configures the Port VLAN Mode The allowed values are None or Specific This parameter affects VLAN ingress and egress processing If None is selected a VLAN tag with the classified VLAN ID is inserted in frames transmitted on the port This mode is normally used for ports connected to VLAN aware switches If Specific the default value is selected a Port VLAN ID can be configured see below Untagged frames received on the port are classified to the Port VLAN ID If VLAN awareness is disabled all frames received on the port are classified to the Port VLAN ID If the classified VLAN ID of a frame trans
272. rt 0 Port 1 Receive Total and Transmit Total e Rx and Tx Packets The number of received and transmitted good and bad packets e Rx and Tx Octets The number of received and transmitted good and bad bytes Includes FCS but excludes framing bits e Rx and Tx Unicast The number of received and transmitted good and bad unicast packets e Rx and Tx Multicast The number of received and transmitted good and bad multicast packets e Rx and Tx Broadcast The number of received and transmitted good and bad broadcast packets Rx and Tx Pause A count of the MAC Control frames received or transmitted on this port that have an opcode indicating a PAUSE operation Receive and Transmit Size Counters The number of received and transmitted good and bad packets split into categories based on their respective frame sizes Receive and Transmit Queue Counters The number of received and transmitted packets per input and output queue Receive Error Counters Rx Drops The number of frames dropped due to lack of receive buffers or egress congestion e Rx CRC Alignment The number of frames received with CRC or alignment errors e Rx Undersize The number of short 1 frames received with valid CRC e Rx Oversize The number of long 2 frames received with valid CRC Rx Fragments The number of short 1 frames received with invalid CRC e Rx Jabber The number of long 2 frames received with invalid CRC 4
273. rt security will use the shorter requested aging period of all modules that use the functionality The Aging Period can be set to a number between 10 and 10 000 000 seconds To understand why aging may be desired consider the following scenario Suppose an end host is connected to a 3rd party switch or hub which in turn is connected to a port on this switch on which Limit Control is enabled The end host will be allowed to forward if the limit is not exceeded Now suppose that the end host logs off or powers down If it wasn t for aging the end host would still take up resources on this switch and will be allowed to forward To overcome this situation enable aging With aging enabled a timer is started once the end host gets secured When the timer expires the switch starts looking for frames from the end host and if such frames are not seen within the next Aging Period the end host is assumed to be disconnected and the corresponding resources are freed on the switch Port Configuration The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in the stack and a number of columns which are Oo Port The port number to which the configuration below applies e Mode Controls whether Limit Control is enabled on this port Both this and the Global Mode must be set to Enabled for Limit Control to be in effect Notice that other modules may still use the underlying port security features without enabling Limit Control on a given port
274. rt to mirror on which port 3 Scroll to disabled enable TX Only and RX Only to set the Port mirror mode 4 Click the Apply to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 17 The Mirror Configuration Mirror Configuration Port to mirror to Disa v DMisallal a 208 Parameter description e Portto mirror on Port to mirror also known as the mirror port Frames from ports that have either source rx or destination tx mirroring enabled are mirrored on this port Disabled disables mirroring Mirror Port Configuration The following table is used for Rx and Tx enabling Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Mode Select mirror mode Rx only Frames received on this port are mirrored on the mirror port Frames transmitted are not mirrored Tx only Frames transmitted on this port are mirrored on the mirror port Frames received are not mirrored Disabled Neither frames transmitted nor frames received are mirrored Enabled Frames received and frames transmitted are mirrored on the mirror port Note For a given port a frame is only transmitted once It is therefore not possible to mirror Tx frames on the mirror port Because of this mode for the selected mirror port is limited to Disabled or Rx only o Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to und
275. rts the frames should go to based upon the DMAC address in the frame This table contains both static and dynamic entries The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports The frames also contain a MAC address SMAC address which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address have been seen after a configurable age time MEP is an acronym for Maintenance Entity Endpoint and is an endpoint in a Maintenance Entity Group ITU T Y 1731 307 MD5 MD5 is an acronym for Message Digest algorithm 5 MD5 is a message digest algorithm used cryptographic hash function with a 128 bit hash value It was designed by Ron Rivest in 1991 MDS is officially defined in RFC 1321 The MD5 Message Digest Algorithm Mirroring For debugging network problems or monitoring network traffic the switch system can be configured to mirror frames from multiple ports to a mirror port In this context mirroring a frame is the same as copying the frame Both incoming Source and outgoing destination frames can be mirrored to the mirror port 308 MLD MVR NAS MLD is an acronym for Multicast Listener Discovery for IPv6 MLD is used
276. s and entries per page 2 Checked Auto refresh Figure 4 1 3 The Dynamic Table Dynamic IP Source Guard Table Start from Port 1 Y VLAN 1 and IP address 00 00 with 20 entries per page Port VLAN ID IP Address MAC Address No more entries o Parameter description Port Switch Port Number for which the entries are displayed e VLANID VLAN ID in which the IP traffic is permitted e IP Address User IP address of the entry MAC Address Source MAC address e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt You can click them for refresh the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table by manual others for next up page or entry 241 4 2 ARP Inspection The section describes to configure the ARP Inspection parameters of the switch You could use the ARP Inspection configure to manage the ARP table 4 2 1 Configuration This section describes how to configure ARP Inspection setting including Mode Enabled and Disabled Port Enabled and Disabled Web Interface To configure an ARP Inspection Configuration in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Mode of ARP Inspection Configuration 2 Select Enabled of the specific port in the Mode of Port Mode Configuration 3 Click Apply Figure 4 2 1 The ARP Inspection Configuration ARP Inspection Configuration M
277. s 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP destination value e TCP UDP Destination Range When Range is selected for the TCP UDP destination filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination range value The allowed range is O to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP destination value e TCP FIN Specify the TCP No more data from sender FIN value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the FIN field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the FIN field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care e TCP SYN Specify the TCP Synchronize sequence numbers SYN value for this ACE 61 0 TCP frames where the SYN field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the SYN field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care TCP RST Specify the TCP Reset the connection RST value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the RST field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the RST field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care e TCP PSH Specify the TCP Push Function PSH value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the PSH field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the PSH field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care e TCP ACK Specify the TCP Acknowledgm
278. s as separators between octets An IPv4 dotted decimal address has the form x y z w where x y z and w are decimal numbers between 0 and 255 DSCP DSCP is an acronym for Differentiated Services Code Point It is a field in the header of IP packets for packet classification purposes E EEE EEE is an abbreviation for Energy Efficient Ethernet defined in IEEE 802 3az EPS EPS is an abbreviation for Ethernet Protection Switching defined in ITU T G 8031 Ethernet Type Ethernet Type or EtherType is a field in the Ethernet MAC header defined by the Ethernet networking standard It is used to indicate which protocol is being transported in an Ethernet frame F 303 FTP FTP is an acronym for File Transfer Protocol It is a transfer protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides file writing and reading It also provides directory service and security features Fast Leave Multicast snooping Fast Leave processing allows the switch to remove an interface from the forwarding table entry without first sending out group specific queries to the interface The VLAN interface is pruned from the multicast tree for the multicast group specified in the original leave message Fast leave processing ensures optimal bandwidth management for all hosts on a switched network even when multiple multicast groups are in use simultaneously This processing applies to IGMP and MLD 304 HTTP HTTP is an acronym for Hypertext Tran
279. s assigned to a frame is used throughout the device for providing queuing scheduling and congestion control guarantees to the frame according to what was configured for that specific QoS class The switch support advanced memory control mechanisms providing excellent performance of all QoS classes under any traffic scenario including jumbo frame A super priority queue with dedicated memory and strict highest priority in the arbitration The ingress super priority queue allows traffic recognized as CPU traffic to be received and queued for transmission to the CPU even when all the QoS class queues are congested 3 14 1 Port Classification The section allows you to configure the basic QoS Ingress Classification settings for all switch ports And the settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To configure the QoS Port Classification parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS Port Classification 2 Scroll to select QoS class DP Level PCP and DEI parameters 3 Click the Apply to save the setting 4 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 14 1 The QoS Configuration QoS Ingress Port Classification Port QoS class DP level PCP DEI Tag Class
280. s the lowest priority queue Rx Tx The number of received and transmitted packets per queue 45 e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh to refresh the Queuing Counters automatically Upper right icon Refresh clear You can click them for refresh the Queuing Counters or clear them by manual 46 3 1 6 SFP Information The section describes that switch could display the SFP module detail information which you connect it to the switch The information includes Connector type Fiber type wavelength banud rate and Vendor OUI etc Web Interface To Display the SFP information in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Port then SFP Information 2 To display the SFP Information Figure 3 1 6 The SFP Information Overview SFP Information for Port 18 Connector Type SFP LC Fiber Type Single Mode SM Tx Central Wavelength 1310 Bit Rate 1000 Mbps Vendor OUI 00 0f 99 Vendor Name APAC Opto Vendor P N L538 C3M TC N DD Vendor Revision 0000 Vendor Serial Number 7507979002 Date Code 071019 Temperature 19 88 C Vec TIT Mon1 Bias 10 mA Mon2 TX PWR 5 74 dBm Mon3 RX PWR 33 53 dBm Parameter description e Connector Type Display the connector type for instance UTP SC ST LC and so on e Fiber Type Display the fiber mode for instance Multi Mode Single Mode e Tx Central Wavelength Display the fiber optical transmitting central wavelength for instance 850nm
281. s the time between repetitions of a node s initial report of interest in a multicast address The allowed range is 0 to 31744 seconds default unsolicited report interval is 1 second Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt You can click them for refresh the IGMP Group Status by manual others for next up page or entry Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 108 3 6 3 Port Group Filtering The section describes that you could to set the Port Group Filtering in the MLD Snooping function On the Ul that you could add new filtering group and safety policy Web Interface To configure the MLD Snooping Port Group Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration Click the Add new Filtering Group Specify the Filtering Groups with entries per page Click the Apply to save the setting SL a cod If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 7 3 The MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration Delete Port Filtering Groups MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration Delete Port Filtering Groups Parameter description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next
282. s to another port or to the system log or shutting down a port This page shows the Access Control List ACL which is made up of the ACEs defined on this switch Each row describes the ACE that is defined The maximum number of ACEs is 256 on each switch Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new ACE to the list The reserved ACEs used for internal protocol cannot be edited or deleted the order sequence cannot be changed and the priority is highest Web Interface To configure Access Control List in the web interface 1 Click Configuration ACL then Configuration 2 Click the O button to add a new ACL or use the other ACL modification buttons to specify the editing action i e edit delete or moving the relative position of entry in the list 3 To specific the parameter of the ACE Click the save to save the setting If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the reset button It will revert to previously saved values 6 When editing an entry on the ACE Configuration page note that the Items displayed depend on various selections such as Frame Type and IP Protocol Type Specify the relevant criteria to be matched for this rule and set the actions to take when a rule is matched such as Rate Limiter Port Copy Logging and Shutdown 54 Figure 3 2 3 The Access Control List Configuration Access Control List Configuration Auto refresh O Ingress Port Policy Bitmask Frame Type
283. s using administrator s identity it will allow the only one who logins first to configure the system The rest of users even with administrator s identity can only monitor the system For those who have no administrator s identity can only monitor the system There are only a maximum of three users able to login simultaneously in the SW24GF4TG NOTE When you login the Switch WEB CLI to manager You must first type the Username of the admin Password was blank so when you type after the end Username please press enter Management page to enter WEB CLI When you login SW24GF4TG series switch Web UI management you can use both ipv4 ipv6 login to manage To optimize the display effect we recommend you use Microsoft IE 6 0 above Netscape V7 1 above or FireFox V1 00 above and have the resolution 1024x768 The switch supported neutral web browser interface NOTE Gi AS SW24GF4TG the function enable dhcp so If you do not have DHCP server to provide ip addresses to the switch the Switch default ip 192 168 1 1 Figure 1 The login page 3243 4 192 168 1 1 A SW24GF41G ABBR E admin TEP Cl tte Re ai system Configuration This chapter describes all of the basic configuration tasks which includes the System Information and any manage of the Switch e g Time Account IP Syslog and SNMP 2 1 System Information After you login the switch shows you the system information This page
284. scard frame after 16 collisions default 36 Restart Restart backoff algorithm after 16 collisions o Power Control The Usage column shows the current percentage of the power consumption per port The Configured column allows for changing the power savings mode parameters per port Disabled All power savings mechanisms disabled ActiPHY Link down power savings enabled PerfectReach Link up power savings enabled Enabled Both link up and link down power saving enabled e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values e Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the Port link Status by manual 37 3 1 2 Port Description The section describes to configure the Port s alias or any descriptions for the Port Identity It provides user to write down an alphanumeric string describing the full name and version identification for the system s hardware type software version and networking application Web Interface To configure a Port Description in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Port then Port Description 2 Specify the detail Port alias or description an alphanumeric string describing the full name and version identification for the system s hardware type software version and networking application 3 Click Apply Figure 3 1 2 The Port Configuration Port Description 38 Parameter description
285. selection is IGMP Auto Forced IGMPv1 Forced IGMPv2 Forced IGMPv3 default compatibility value is IGMP Auto Rv Robustness Variable The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a network The allowed range is 1 to 255 default robustness variable value is 2 95 Qi Query Interval The Query Interval is the interval between General Queries sent by the Querier The allowed range is 1 to 31744 seconds default query interval is 125 seconds QRI Query Response Interval The Max Response Time used to calculate the Max Resp Code inserted into the periodic General Queries The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default query response interval is 100 in tenths of seconds 10 seconds LLQI LMQI for IGMP Last Member Query Interval The Last Member Query Time is the time value represented by the Last Member Query Interval multiplied by the Last Member Query Count The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default last member query interval is 10 in tenths of seconds 1 second URI Unsolicited Report Interval The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a host s initial report of membership in a group The allowed range is 0 to 31744 seconds default unsolicited report interval is 1 second Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Upper right icon Refresh lt
286. server to client e Transmit Error The number of packets that resulted in error while being sent to servers eo Receive from Client 252 The number of received packets from server Receive Agent Option The number of received packets with relay agent information option Replace Agent Option The number of packets which were replaced with relay agent information option Keep Agent Option The number of packets whose relay agent information was retained Drop Agent Option The number of packets that were dropped which were received with relay agent information Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Clear You can click them for refresh the DHCP Relay Statistics by manual others for clear to clean up the entries 253 4 5 NAS The section describes to configure the NAS parameters of the switch The NAS server can be employed to connect users to a variety of resources including Internet access conference calls printing documents on shared printers or by simply logging on to the Internet 4 5 1 Configuration This section describes how to configure NAS setting of IEEE 802 1X MAC based authentication system and port settings The NAS configuration consists of two sections a system and a port wide Web Interface To configure a System Configuration of Network Access Server in the web interface S Select Enable
287. sfer Protocol It is a protocol that used to transfer or convey information on the World Wide Web WWW HTTP defines how messages are formatted and transmitted and what actions Web servers and browsers should take in response to various commands For example when you enter a URL in your browser this actually sends an HTTP command to the Web server directing it to fetch and transmit the requested Web page The other main standard that controls how the World Wide Web works is HTML which covers how Web pages are formatted and displayed Any Web server machine contains in addition to the Web page files it can serve an HTTP daemon a program that is designed to wait for HTTP requests and handle them when they arrive The Web browser is an HTTP client sending requests to server machines An HTTP client initiates a request by establishing a Transmission Control Protocol TCP connection to a particular port on a remote host port 80 by default An HTTP server listening on that port waits for the client to send a request message HTTPS ICMP HTTPS is an acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer It is used to indicate a secure HTTP connection HTTPS provide authentication and encrypted communication and is widely used on the World Wide Web for security sensitive communication such as payment transactions and corporate logons HTTPS is really just the use of Netscape s Secure Socket Layer SSL as a sublayer under its
288. since last Topology Change occurred Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh to refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the STP Bridges status information by manual 88 3 4 7 Port Status After you complete the STP configuration the you could to ask the switch display the STP Port Status The Section provides you to ask switch to display the STP CIST port status for physical ports of the currently selected switch Web Interface To display the STP Port status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Spanning Tree STP Port Status 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the STP Bridges Figure 3 4 7 The STP Port status STP Port Status Parameter description eo Port The switch port number of the logical STP port e CIST Role 89 The current STP port role of the CIST port The port role can be one of the following values AlternatePort Backup Port RootPort DesignatedPort Disabled CIST State The current STP port state of the CIST port The port state can be one of the following values Blocking Learning Forwarding Uptime The time since the bridge port was last initialized Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh to refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the STP Port status information by manual 9
289. smitted e Rx and Tx Decline The number of decline option 53 with value 4 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx ACK The number of ACK option 53 with value 5 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx NAK The number of NAK option 53 with value 6 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Release The number of release option 53 with value 7 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Inform The number of inform option 53 with value 8 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Lease Query The number of lease query option 53 with value 10 packets received and transmitted 248 Rx and Tx Lease Unassigned The number of lease unassigned option 53 with value 11 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Lease Unknown The number of lease unknown option 53 with value 12 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Lease Active The number of lease active option 53 with value 13 packets received and transmitted Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Clear You can click them for refresh the DHCP Snooping Port Statistics by manual others for clear to clean up the entries 249 4 4 DHCP Relay The section describes how to forward DHCP requests to another specific DHCP server via DHCP relay The DHCP servers may be on another network 4 4 1 Configuration This section describes how to confi
290. ss settings you can change ingress translation and classification settings for individual ports There are two configuration parameters available in Ingress 1 Translate To Enable the Ingress Translation click the checkbox 2 Classify Classification for a port have 4 different values eDisable No Ingress DSCP Classification eDSCP 0 Classify if incoming or translated if enabled DSCP is 0 eSelected Classify only selected DSCP for which classification is enabled as specified in DSCP Translation window for the specific DSCP eAll Classify all DSCP e Egress Port Egress Rewriting can be one of below parameters e Disable No Egress rewrite e Enable Rewrite enable without remapped e Remap DSCP from analyzer is remapped and frame is remarked with remapped DSCP value e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 183 3 14 8 DSCP Based QoS The section will teach user to configure the DSCP Based QoS mode that This page allows you to configure the basic QoS DSCP based QoS Ingress Classification settings for all switches Web Interface To configure the DSCP Based QoS Ingress Classification parameters in the web interface Click Configuration QoS DSCP Based QoS Evoke to enable or disable the DSCP for Trust Scroll to select QoS Class and DPL parameters Click the Apply to save the setting If you want to cancel the setting then you need
291. statistics please check the button W and choice lt Enable gt to configure SNMP function Web Interface To display the configure SNMP Configuration in the web interface 1 Click SNMP Configuration 2 Evoke SNMP State to enable or disable the SNMP function 3 Click Apply Figure2 6 2 The SNMP Configuration SNMP Configuration Get Community public Set Community private Enable v rr rra rara rara Apply Parameter description Get Community Indicates the community read access string to permit access to SNMP agent The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The field is applicable only when SNMP version is SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c If SNMP version is SNMPv3 the community string will be associated with SNMPv3 communities table It provides more flexibility to configure security name than a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community string In addition to community string a particular range of source addresses can be used to restrict source subnet Set Community Indicates the community writes access string to permit access to SNMP agent The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The field is applicable only when SNMP version is SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c If SNMP version is SNMPv3 the community string will be associated with SNMPv3 communities table It provides more flexibility to configure secur
292. statistics information or clear by manual 74 3 4 Spanning Tree The Spanning Tree Protocol STP can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices that is an STP compliant switch bridge or router in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down STP STP uses a distributed algorithm to select a bridging device STP compliant switch bridge or router that serves as the root of the spanning tree network It selects a root port on each bridging device except for the root device which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that device to the root device Then it selects a designated bridging device from each LAN which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that LAN to the root device All ports connected to designated bridging devices are assigned as designated ports After determining the lowest cost spanning tree it enables all root ports and designated ports and disables all other ports Network packets are therefore only forwarded between root ports and designated ports eliminating any possible network loops Designated i Root ke X ji Designated Runi Designated Port or y Bridge OOOO X a A a Once a stable network
293. t Enabling Link OAM provides the network operators the ability to monitor the health of the network and quickly determine the location of failing links or fault conditions OAM Mode To scroll to select OAM mode with Passive or Active It supports you to configure the OAM Mode as Active or Passive The default mode is Passive Passive DTE s configured in Passive mode do not initiate the Discovery process Passive DTE s react to the initiation of the Discovery process by the remote DTE This eliminates the possibility of passive to passive links Passive DTE s shall not send Variable Request or Loopback Control OAMPDUs Active DTE s configured in Active mode initiate the exchange of Information OAMPDUs as defined by the Discovery process Once the Discovery process completes Active DTE s are permitted to send any OAMPDU while connected to a remote OAM peer entity in Active mode Active DTE s operate in a limited respect if the remote OAM entity is operating in Passive mode Active devices should not respond to OAM remote loopback commands and variable requests from a Passive peer e Loopback support To evoke to enable the Loopback support Link OAM remote loopback can be used for fault localization and link performance testing Enabling the loopback support will allow the DTE to execute the remote loopback command that helps in the fault detection e Link Monitor support Controls whether the Link Monitor support is enabled for the switch
294. t with Radius Server To configure a TACACS Authentication Server Configuration of AAA in the web interface 1 Check Enabled 2 Specify IP address or Hostname for TACACS Server 3 Specify Authentication Port for TACACS Server Default is 49 4 Specify the Secret with TACACS Server Figure 4 5 3 1 The Common Server Configuration 267 Authentication Server Configuration Common Server Configuration TACACS Authorization and Accounting Configuration Figure 4 5 3 2 The TACACS Accounting Configuration TACACS Authorization and Accounting Configuration 268 Figure 4 5 3 3 The RADIUS Configuration RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration Enabled IP Address Hostname Port Figure 4 5 3 4 The RADIUS Accounting Configuration RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration Figure 4 5 3 4 The TACACS Authentication Configuration TACACS Authentication Server Configuration Parameter description Timeout The Timeout which can be set to a number between 3 and 3600 seconds is the maximum time to wait for a reply from a server If the server does not reply within this timeframe we will consider it to be dead and continue with the next enabled server if any RADIUS servers are using the UDP protocol which is unreliable by design In order to cope with lost frames the timeout interval is divided into 3 subintervals of equal length If a reply is not received within the subinterv
295. te the entry It will be deleted during the next save o User Name A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Security Level Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are NoAuth NoPriv No authentication and no privacy Auth NoPriv Authentication and no privacy Auth Priv Authentication and privacy The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exists Th means it must first be ensured that the value is set correctly e Authentication Protocol Indicates the authentication protocol that this entry should belong to Possible authentication protocols are 26 None No authentication protocol MD5 An optional flag to indicate that this user uses MD5 authentication protocol SHA An optional flag to indicate that this user uses SHA authentication protocol The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exists That means must first ensure that the value is set correctly e Authentication Password A string identifying the authentication password phrase For MD5 authentication protocol the allowed string length is 8 to 32 For SHA authentication protocol the allowed string length is 8 to 40 The allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Privacy Protocol Indicates the privacy protocol that th
296. te to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To configure the DSCP Classification parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS DSCP Translation 2 Scroll to set the DSCP Parameters 3 Click the Apply to save the setting 4 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button 5 It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 14 10 The DSCP Classification Configuration DSCP Classification QoS Class DSCP pl lt gt v 0 0 BE v 1 OBE w 2 O BE w a OB w 4 0 BE v 5 0 BE v 6 HoD M F OE w i i Ad Parameter description e QoS Class Available QoS Class value ranges from 0 to 7 QoS Class 0 7 can be mapped to followed parameters e DPL Drop Precedence Level 0 1 can be configured for all available QoS Classes e DSCP Select DSCP value 0 63 from DSCP menu to map DSCP to corresponding QoS Class and DPL value e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 18 00 3 14 11 QoS Control List Configuration The section shows the QoS Control List QCL which is made up of the QCEs Each row describes a QCE that is defined The maximum number of QCEs is 256 on each switch Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new QCE to the list Web Interface To configure the QoS Control List parameters
297. ted Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Disabled Unlimited 15 Disabled Y Unlimited A mientlad RA T Tatimin v B OO N M MR wl ny e 4 E a E ollo EES A Y Z F lt lt lt oO a lt JE ii ii N 5 EE lt a lt lt i lt Parameter description e Mode of IP Source Guard Configuration Enable the Global IP Source Guard or disable the Global IP Source Guard All configured ACEs will be lost when the mode is enabled Port Mode Configuration Specify IP Source Guard is enabled on which ports Only when both Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled IP Source Guard is enabled on this given port e Max Dynamic Clients Specify the maximum number of dynamic clients that can be learned on given port This value can be 0 1 2 or unlimited If the port mode is enabled and the value of max dynamic client is equal to 0 it means only allow the IP packets forwarding that are matched in static entries on the specific port e Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 238 4 1 2 Static Table The section describes to configure the Static IP Source Guard Table parameters of the switch You could use the Static IP Source Guard Table configure to manage the entries Web Interface
298. ted port Discontinuities of these counters can occur at re initialization of the management system Web Interface To display the Statistics in the web interface 1 Click Configuration 802 3ah OAM then Statistics 2 Scroll to select which port you want to monitor the Statistics 3 Evoke auto refresh to update the detailed Link Events data 4 Click the Refresh to update the Link OAM Port statistics Figure 3 20 5 The detailed Link OAM Port Statistics Detailed Link OAM Statistics for Port 1 Pot Auto refresh O Parameter description Port Receive Total Transmit Total Rx OAM Information PDU s O Tx OAM Information PDU s 0 Rx Unique Error Event Notification O Tx Unique Error Event Notification D Rx Duplicate Error Event Notification D Tx Duplicate Error Event Notification 0 Rx Loopback Control D Tx Loopback Control 0 Rx Variable Request 0 Tx Variable Request 0 Rx Variable Response 0 Tx Variable Response 0 _Rx Org Specific PDU s 0 Tx Org Specific PDU s 0 Rx Unsupported Codes D Tx Unsupported Codes 0 Rx Link Fault PDU s 0 Tx Link Fault PDU s 0 Rx Dying Gasp 0 Tx Dying Gasp 0 Rx Critical Event PDU s 0 Tx Critical Event PDU s Lo You can scroll to select which port you want to monitor detailed Link OAM events It shows the switch port number Rx and Tx OAM Information PDU s The number of received and transmitted OAM Information PDU s Discontinuities of t
299. ted switch in the stack and a number of columns which are Port The port number for which the status applies Click the port number to see the status for this particular port Users Each of the user modules has a column that shows whether that module has enabled Port Security or not A means that the corresponding user module is not enabled whereas a letter indicates that the user module abbreviated by that letter see Abbr has enabled port security State Shows the current state of the port It can take one of four values Disabled No user modules are currently using the Port Security service Ready The Port Security service is in use by at least one user module and is awaiting frames from unknown MAC addresses to arrive Limit Reached The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user module and that module has indicated that the limit is reached and no more MAC addresses should be taken in Shutdown The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user module and that module has indicated that the limit is exceeded No MAC addresses can be learned on the port until it is administratively re opened on the Limit Control configuration Web page MAC Count Current Limit The two columns indicate the number of currently learned MAC addresses forwarding as well as blocked and the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port respectively If no user
300. tener MLD host a a O sm Source e O I Ol Listener MLD host 3 6 1 Basic Configuration The section will let you understand how to configure the MLD Snooping basic configuration and the parameters Web Interface To configure the MLD Snooping Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration MLD Snooping Basic Configuration 2 Evoke to enable or disable the Global configuration parameters Evoke the port to join Router port and Fast Leave Scroll to select the Throttling mode with unlimited or 1 to 10 Click the Apply to save the setting If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values 104 Figure 3 6 1 The MLD Snooping Basic Configuration MLD Snooping Configuration Global Configuration Snooping Enabled O Unregistered IPMC6 Flooding Enabled C MLD SSM Range Proxy Enabled Port Related Configuration Port Router Port FastLeave Throttling E O O gt Y 1 O O unlimited Y 2 O O unlimited Y El O O unlimited Y 4 O O unlimited Y 5 O O unlimited Y 6 O O unlimited Y al O O unlimited Y 8 O O unlimited Y 9 O O unlimited Y 10 O O unlimited Y 11 O O unlimited Y 12 O O unlimited Y 13 O O unlimited Y 14 O CJ unlimited Y 15 O O unlimited Y 16 O O unlimited Y 1 J CJ unlimited Y 18 O O unlimited Y 19
301. terface 1 Click Configuration ACL then Rate Limiter 2 To specific the Rate field and the range from 0 to 3276700 3 To scroll the Unit with pps or kbps 4 Click the Apply to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 2 2 The ACL Rate Limiter Configuration ACL Rate Limiter Configuration Rate Limiter ID Rate pps e E A 1 rao l 3 l aj B Bl AB el Jg 10 1 n 1 12 1 13 1 141 1 15 1 16 1 i Al Parameter description e Rate Limiter ID The rate limiter ID for the settings contained in the same row Oo Rate 52 The allowed values are 0 131071 in pps eo Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 53 3 2 3 Access Control List The section describes how to configure Access Control List rule An Access Control List ACL is a sequential list of permit or denies conditions that apply to IP addresses MAC addresses or other more specific criteria This switch tests ingress packets against the conditions in an ACL one by one A packet will be accepted as soon as it matches a permit rule or dropped as soon as it matches a deny rule If no rules match the frame is accepted Other actions can also be invoked when a matching packet is found including rate limiting copying matching packet
302. terface The router on the upstream interface should be running IGMP 3 5 1 Basic Configuration The section describes how to set the basic IGMP snooping on the switch which connects to a router closer to the root of the tree This interface is the upstream interface The router on the upstream interface should be running GMP Web Interface To configure the IGMP Snooping parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration IGMP Snooping Basic Configuration 2 Evoke to select enable or disable which Global configuration 3 Evoke which port wants to become a Router Port or enable disable the Fast Leave function Scroll to set the Throttling parameter Click the Apply to save the setting If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button OE It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 5 1 The I GMP Snooping Configuration 92 IGMP Snooping Configuration Global Configuration Snooping Enabled Unregistered IPMCv4 Flooding Enabled _ IGMP SSM Range Proxy Enabled Throttling unlimited unlirnited unlimited unlimited v v v v v unlimited Y v v v v v unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited 10 O O unlimited Y m m mmlimited WE mlimitel Y Parameter description Snooping Enabled Enable the Global IGMP Snooping Unregistered I PMCv4 Flooding enabled Enable unregistered IPMCv4 traffic fl
303. tes the duration of the period in terms of 100 ms 222 intervals encoded as a 16 bit unsigned integer Event Seconds Summary Threshold The field shows this two octet field indicates the number of errored frame seconds in the period is required to be equal to or greater than in order for the event to be generated encoded as a 16 bit unsigned integer Event Seconds Summary Events The field shows this two octet field indicates the number of errored frame seconds in the period encoded as a 16 bit unsigned integer Event Seconds Summary Error Total The field shows this four octet field indicates the sum of errored frame seconds that have been detected since the OAM sub layer was reset Event Seconds Summary Event Total The field shows This four octet field indicates the number of Errored Frame Seconds Summary Event TLVs that have been generated since the OAM sub layer was reset encoded as a 32bit unsigned integer Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh clear You can click them for refresh the refresh or clear information by manual 223 3 20 5 Statistics This chapter introduces how to provide detailed OAM traffic statistics for a specific switch port Use the port select box to select which switch port details to display The displayed counters represent the total number of OAM frames received and transmitted for the selec
304. th mode reauthentication doesn t cause direct communication between the switch and the client so this will not detect whether the client is still attached or not and the only way to free any resources is to age the entry Hold Time This setting applies to the following modes i e modes using the Port Security functionality to secure MAC addresses e Single 802 1X Multi 802 1X MAC Based Auth If a client is denied access either because the RADIUS server denies the client access or because the RADIUS server request times out according to the timeout specified on the Configuration Security AAA page the client is put on hold in the Unauthorized state The hold timer does not count during an on going authentication In MAC based Auth mode the The switch will ignore new frames coming from the client during the hold time The Hold Time can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled RADIUS assigned QoS provides a means to centrally control the traffic class to which traffic coming from a successfully authenticated supplicant is assigned on the switch The RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of this feature see RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled below for a detailed description The RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable RADIUS server assigned QoS Class functionality When checked the ind
305. that NAS has put the port in The field is blank if the Port VLAN ID is not overridden by NAS If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server RADIUS assigned is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about RADIUS assigned VLANs here If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN Guest is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about Guest VLANs here Port Counters EAPOL Counters These supplicant frame counters are available for the following administrative states e Force Authorized e Force Unauthorized e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X e Multi 802 1X 264 eo Backend Server Counters These backend RADIUS frame counters are available for the following administrative states e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X e Multi 802 1X e MAC based Auth e Last Supplicant Client Info Information about the last supplicant client that attempted to authenticate This information is available for the following administrative states e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X e Multi 802 1X e MAC based Auth Selected Counters e Selected Counters The Selected Counters table is visible when the port is in one of the following administrative states e Multi 802 1X e MAC based Auth The table is identical to and is placed next to the Port Counters table and will be empty if no MAC address is currently selected To populate the table select one of the attached MAC Addresses from the table below Attached MAC Addresses e Identity
306. thernet OAM Click Add new MEP then you can create new MEP on the switch Assign each parameter to add new MEP If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Click Refresh then switch will update the MEP table by manually Figure 3 21 1 The Maintenance Entity Point Configuration Maintenance Entity Point Refresh Delete Instance Domain Mode Direction Residence Port Level Flow Instance Tagged VID This MAC Alarm Apply Reset Maintenance Entity Point Refresh Delete Instance Domain Mode Direction Residence Port Level Flow Instance Tagged VID This MAC Alarm Por Mep ingress vo y o 1 o Parameter description e Delete This box is used to mark a MEP for deletion in next Save operation e Instance The ID of the MEP Click on the ID of a MEP to enter the configuration page e Domain You can scroll to select the domain with Port Esp Evc and Mpls Port This is a MEP in the Port Domain Flow Instance is a Port Esp Future use needs to upgrade FW then will support it Eve This is a MEP in the EVC Domain Flow Instance is a EVC Mpls Future use needs to upgrade FW then will support it Mode In the field you can scroll to select Mep or Mip 226 MEP This is a Maintenance Entity End Point MIP This is a Maintenan
307. tion controls the port s authentication mode The following modes are available o Force Authorized In this mode the switch will send one EAPOL Success frame when the port link comes up and any client on the port will be allowed network access without authentication o Force Unauthorized In this mode the switch will send one EAPOL Failure frame when the port link comes up and any client on the port will be disallowed network access eo Port based 802 1X In the 802 1X world the user is called the supplicant the switch is the authenticator and the RADIUS server is the authentication server The authenticator acts as the man in the 257 middle forwarding requests and responses between the supplicant and the authentication server Frames sent between the supplicant and the switch are special 802 1X frames known as EAPOL EAP Over LANs frames EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs RFC3748 Frames sent between the switch and the RADIUS server are RADIUS packets RADIUS packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like the switch s IP address name and the supplicant s port number on the switch EAP is very flexible in that it allows for different authentication methods like MD5 Challenge PEAP and TLS The important thing is that the authenticator the switch doesn t need to know which authentication method the supplicant and the authentication server are using or how many information exchange frames are n
308. to the client device on the network 2 4 2 IPV6 This section describes how to configure the switch managed IPv6 information The Configured column is used to view or change the IPv6 configuration And the Current column is used to show the active Pv6 configuration Configure the switch managed Pv6 information on this page The Configured column is used to view or change the Pv6 configuration The Current column is used to show the active Pv6 configuration Web Interface To configure Management Pv6 of the switch in the web interface 1 Click System IPv6 Configuration 2 Specify the Pv6 settings and enable Auto Configuration service if required 3 Click Apply Figure2 4 2 The I Pv6 configuration IPv6 Configuration Configured Current Auto Configuration O B 192 168 1 1 OoOo AE Link Local Address fe80 240 c7fffe9e 740_ Prefix 96 96 Gateway E E Apply Parameter description e Auto Configuration Enable IPv6 auto configuration by checking this box If fails the configured IPv6 address is zero The router may delay responding to a router solicitation for a few seconds the total time needed to complete auto configuration can be significantly longer e Address Provide the IPv6 address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe0
309. to the extended network The current version of the Internet protocol is IPv4 which has 32 bits Internet Protocol addresses allowing for in excess of four billion unique addresses This number is reduced drastically by the practice of webmasters taking addresses in large blocks the bulk of which remain unused There is a rather substantial movement to adopt a new version of the Internet Protocol IPv6 which would have 128 bits Internet Protocol addresses This number can be represented roughly by a three with thirty nine zeroes after it However IPv4 is still the protocol of choice for most of the Internet IPMC is an acronym for IP MultiCast IP Source Guard IP Source Guard is a secure feature used to restrict IP traffic on DHCP snooping untrusted ports by filtering traffic based on the DHCP Snooping Table or manually configured IP Source Bindings It helps prevent IP spoofing attacks when a host tries to spoof and use the IP address of another host 306 L LACP LLC LLDP LACP is an IEEE 802 3ad standard protocol The Link Aggregation Control Protocol allows bundling several physical ports together to form a single logical port The IEEE 802 2 Logical Link Control LLC protocol provides a link mechanism for upper layer protocols It is the upper sub layer of the Data Link Layer and provides multiplexing mechanisms that make it possible for several network protocols IP IPX to coexist within a multipoint network LLC header
310. tries and is sorted first by VLAN ID then by MAC address Web Interface To Display MAC Address Table in the web interface 1 Click Dynamic MAC Table 2 Specify the VLAN and MAC Address 3 Display MAC Address Table Figure 3 9 2 The Dynamic MAC Address Table information MAC Address Table Auto refresh C Refresh Clear ke gt gt Start from VLAN 1 and MAC address 00 00 00 00 00 00 with 20 entries per page Port Members Type VLAN MAC Address cpu 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Static 1 00 40 F6 9E 07 DD v Dynamic 1 00 E0 4C 12 01 86 vo Static 1 33 33 00 00 00 01 v fw fw v ly ww tw vy vw fw fw w wy wo fw fw wo o fe fe wo o o fe o o o de Static 1 33 33 00 00 00 02 v fv v v vw vw fw v v vo vo fw fw dw vo fw o o o fe o vo o e o Static 1 38333 FF 9E 07 DO y wo wo e wo vo e we we de de fe e e ds da e i de de ed de de ed fa Static 1 3833 FF A8 01 01 v v fv v vo v Iw vo v wo o dw wv wo wo vo wo wd vo wo vo vo vo Static 1 EF FF FR FF FE FF wo vw vw vw vw fw vw vo vw vs tw o o wo o o lr lo e o o v Static 4095 00 40 F6 9E 07 D0 v Static 4095 _ FF FF FF FF FF FF v wo w Jw vo wo Iw vo v v v v tw o wy Iw dw we lo v tw v v v v we we
311. two different devices establish the mode of operation and the speed settings that can be shared by those devices for a link CC CC is an acronym for Continuity Check It is a MEP functionality that is able to detect loss of continuity in a network by transmitting CCM frames to a peer MEP CCM CCM is an acronym for Continuity Check Message It is a OAM frame transmitted from a MEP to it s peer MEP and used to implement CC functionality CDP CDP is an acronym for Cisco Discovery Protocol D DEI DEI is an acronym for Drop Eligible Indicator It is a 1 bit field in the VLAN tag DES DES is an acronym for Data Encryption Standard It provides a complete description of a mathematical algorithm for encrypting enciphering and decrypting deciphering binary coded information Encrypting data converts it to an unintelligible form called cipher Decrypting cipher converts the data back to its original form called plaintext The algorithm described in this standard specifies both enciphering and deciphering operations which are based on a binary number called a key DHCP DHCP is an acronym for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol It is a protocol used for assigning dynamic IP addresses to devices on a network DHCP used by networked computers clients to obtain IP addresses and other parameters such as the default gateway subnet mask and IP addresses of DNS servers from a DHCP server The DHCP server ensures that all IP addresses are uniqu
312. ty Level There are three kinds of choices NoAuth NoPriv No authentication and no privacy Auth NoPriv Authentication and no privacy Auth Priv Authentication and privacy Authentication Protocol You can choose MD5 or SHA for authentication Authentication Password The length of MD5 Authentication Password is restricted to 8 32 The length of SHA Authentication Password is restricted to 8 40 Privacy Protocol You can set DES encryption for UserName Privacy Password The length of Privacy Password is restricted to 8 32 34 Configuration This chapter describes all of the basic network configuration tasks which include the Ports Layer 2 network protocol e g VLANs QoS IGMP ACLs and PoE etc and any setting of the Switch 3 1 Port The section describes to configure the Port detail parameters of the switch Others you could using the Port configure to enable or disable the Port of the switch Monitor the ports content or status in the function 3 1 1 Configuration This chapter describes how to view the current port configuration and how to configure ports to non default settings including Linkup Linkdown Speed Current and configured Flow Control Current Rx Current Tx and Configured Maximum Frame Size Excessive Collision Mode Power Control Web Interface To configure an Current Port Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Port then Configuration 2 Specify the Sp
313. ub to piggy back on the successfully authenticated client and get network access even though they really aren t authenticated To overcome this security breach use the Single 802 1X variant Single 802 1X is really not an IEEE standard but features many of the same characteristics as does port based 802 1X In Single 802 1X at most one supplicant can get authenticated on the port at a time Normal EAPOL frames are used in the communication between the supplicant and the switch If more than one supplicant is connected to a port the one that comes first when the port s link comes up will be the first one considered If that supplicant doesn t provide valid credentials within a certain amount of time another supplicant will get a chance Once a supplicant is successfully authenticated only that supplicant will be allowed access This is the most secure of all the supported modes In this mode the Port Security module is used to secure a supplicant s MAC address once successfully authenticated Multi 802 1X In port based 802 1X authentication once a supplicant is successfully authenticated on a port the whole port is opened for network traffic This allows other clients connected to the port for instance through a hub to piggy back on the successfully authenticated client and get network access even though they really aren t authenticated To overcome this security breach use the Multi 802 1X variant Multi 802 1X is really not an IEEE stand
314. ugh Port B they will have access to the same resources as those accessing the network through Port A do which brings security issues To provide user access and ensure data security in the meantime the MAC based VLAN technology is developed MAC based VLANs group VLAN members by MAC address With MAC based VLAN configured the device adds a VLAN tag to an untagged frame according to its source MAC address MAC based VLANs are mostly used in conjunction with security technologies such as 802 1X to provide secure flexible network access for terminal devices 3 10 6 1 Configuration The MAC based VLAN entries can be configured here This page allows for adding and deleting MAC based VLAN entries and assigning the entries to different ports This page shows only static entries Web Interface To configure MAC address based VLAN configuration in the web interface 1 Click MAC address based VLAN configuration and add new entry 2 Specify the MAC address and VLAN ID 3 Click Save Figure 3 10 6 1 The MAC based VLAN Membership Configuration MAC based VLAN Membership Configuration Port Members Delete MAC Address VLAN ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Currently no entries present Parameter description Delete To delete a MAC based VLAN entry check this box and press save The entry will be deleted on the selected switch in the stack 151 e MAC Address
315. ule_id port_no The parameter of vlan_id is the first two bytes represent the VLAN ID The parameter of module_id is the third byte for the module ID in standalone switch it always equal 0 in stackable switch it means switch ID The parameter of port_no is the fourth byte and it means the port number The Remote ID is 6 bytes in length and the value is equal the DHCP relay agents MAC address DHCP Snooping DHCP Snooping is used to block intruder on the untrusted ports of the switch device when it tries to intervene by injecting a bogus DHCP reply packet to a legitimate conversation between the DHCP client and server DNS DNS is an acronym for Domain Name System It stores and associates many types of information with domain names Most importantly DNS translates human friendly domain names and computer hostnames into computer friendly IP addresses For example the domain name www example com might translate to 192 168 0 1 DoS DoS is an acronym for Denial of Service In a denial of service DoS attack an attacker attempts to prevent legitimate users from accessing information or services By targeting at network sites or network connection an attacker may be able to prevent network users from accessing email web sites online accounts banking etc or other services that rely on the affected computer Dotted Decimal Notation Dotted Decimal Notation refers to a method of writing IP addresses using decimal numbers and dot
316. v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Enabled Y Enabled v Enabled Y Enabled v Disabled we Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Enabled Y Enabled v Enabled v Enabled Y Enabled Y CI Pmi oo A 9 Permit y oo Pmi o pl Pemit y oo Permit Op Permit o oo O Enabled Y Enabled v Enabled v Enabled v Enabled v Enabled v Enabled Y Enabled v o mity O Enabled Enabled Y K Disabled Disabled v E Disabled Disabled abled v Disabled v Dis E Disabled Disabled v CA EIA Parameter description Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Policy ID Select the policy to apply to this port The allowed values are 1 through 8 The default value is 1 Action Select whether forwarding is permitted Permit or denied Deny The default value is Permit Rate Limiter 1D Select which rate limiter to apply on this port The allowed values are Disabled or the values 1 through 16 The default value is Disabled Port Copy Select which port fram
317. ves Received The number of Received V2 Leaves Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the log automatically Upper right icon Refresh clear You can click them for refresh the Status or clear them by manual 100 3 5 5 Group Information After you complete to set the IGMP Snooping function then you could let the switch to display the IGMP Snooping Group Information Entries in the IGMP Group Table are shown on this page The IGMP Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by group The will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the button to start over Web Interface To display the IGMP Snooping Group Information in the web interface 1 Click Configuration IGMP Snooping Group Information 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh a entry of the IGMP Snooping Groups Information 4 Click lt lt or gt gt to move to previous or next entry Figure 3 5 5 The I GMP Snooping Groups Information IGMP Snooping Groups Information Start from VLAN 1 and group address 224 000 with 20 entries per page Port Members VLAN ID Groups 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 s 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 No more entries Parameter des
318. witch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to based upon the DMAC address in the frame This table contains both static and dynamic entries The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports The frames also contain a MAC address SMAC address which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address has been seen after a configurable age time 3 9 1 Configuration The MAC Address Table is configured on this page Set timeouts for entries in the dynamic MAC Table and configure the static MAC table here Web Interface To configure MAC Address Table in the web interface Aging Configuration 1 Click configuration 2 Specify the Disable Automatic Aging and Aging Time 3 Click Apply MAC Table Learning 1 Click configuration 2 Specify the Port Members Auto Disable Secure 3 Click Apply Static MAC Table Configuration 1 Click configuration and Add new Static entry 2 Specify the VLAN IP and Mac address Port Members 3 Click Apply Figure 3 9 1 The MAC Address Table Configuration 137 MAC Address Table Configuration Aging Configuration Disable Automatic Aging O Aging Time seconds
319. y booklet included with the product A copy of the specific warranty terms applicable to your Manufacture products and replacement parts can be obtained from your Manufacture Sales and Service Office authorized dealer Manufacture Technology does not warrant that the hardware will work properly in all environments and applications and marks no warranty and representation either implied or expressed with respect to the quality performance merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose Manufacture disclaims liability for any inaccuracies or omissions that may have occurred Information in this User s Manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Manufacture Manufacture assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies that may be contained in this User s Manual Manufacture makes no commitment to update or keep current the information in this User s Manual and reserves the righter to make improvements to this User s Manual and or to the products described in this User s Manual at any time without notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used i

User Manual(130321)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents